Material Properties: (ESE - 1992) (ESE - 1992)

Chapter 1 Material Properties
01. In a compression on mild steel (ESE -1992) 06. Which of the following is primarily responsible for
(a) Necking does not occur toughness of steel? (ESE -1992)
(b) Hooke’s law is not valid (a) Iron (b) Carbon
(c) Hooke’s law is valid beyond yield point (c) Manganese (d) Phosphorous
(d) Strength in compression is much greater than
the strength in tension 07. As compared to mild steel, high carbon steel has
less (ESE -1992)
02. For most brittle materials generally ultimate strength (a) Ultimate strength
in compression is much larger than the ultimate (b) hardness
strength in tension because (ESE -1992) (c) Ductility
(a) of flaws such as microscopic cracks or cavities (d) Hardness and ductility
(b) Compression failure is due to normal stress
and failure in tension is due to shear stress 08. Consider the following statements:
(c) Yield point does not occur in compression Assertion (A): An isotropic material is always
(d) of inherent properties of materials homogeneous
Reason (R): An isotropic material is one in which
03. Which of the following statement is false? all the properties are the same in all the directions.
(ESE -1992) Of these statements (ESE -1993)
(a) The stress dependent part of the plastic (a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct
deformation is referred to as creep, and the explanation of A
time dependent part which is also influenced (b) Both A and R are true but R is not a correct
by the temperature as slip. explanation of A
(b) In case of ductile material possessing a well- (c) A is true but R is false
defined yield point, the proportional limit (d) A is false but R is true
almost coincides.
(c) A fatigue failure is of a brittle nature even for 09. Consider the following statements regarding tensile
materials which are normally ductile test diagrams for carbon steels with varying carbon
(d) The endurance limit for machined and polished contents.
specimens is higher than for rolled or fogged As the carbon content increases
components. 1. The ultimate strength of steel decreases
2. The elongation before fracture increases
04. For carbon steel, the endurance limit is 3. The ductility of the metal decreases
approximately (ESE -1992) 4. The percentage elongation of steel decreases
(a) 0.3 (b) 0.5 (c) 0.75 ( d) 0.85 Of these statements (ESE -1993)
(a) 3 and 4 are correct
05. The yield stress of a twisted bar as compared to an (b) 1 and 3 are correct
ordinary mild steel bar is nearly (ESE -1992) (c) 1, 2 and 3 are correct
(a) 50% more (b) 25% more (d) 1 and 2 are correct
(c) 50% less (d) 25% less
ACE Engineering Publications Hyderabad  Delhi  Pune  Bhubaneswar  Bengaluru  Lucknow  Chennai  Vijayawada  Vizag  Tirupati  Kolkata  Ahmedabad
101 Material Properties
10. Consider the following factors: 14. When a mild-steel specimen fails in a torsion-test,
1. Large number of loading cycles the fracture looks like (ESE-1995)
2. Large variations in stress (a) (b)
3. Large stress concentrations
Those associated with fatigue failure include
(ESE -1993) (c) (d)
(a) 1 and 2 (b) 1 and 3
(c) 2 and 3 (d) 1, 2 and 3
11. A deviator state of stress is characterized by 15. The stress level, below which a material has a high
(ESE-1994) probability of not failing under reversal of stress, is
(a) a change in volume without distortion known as (ESE-1995)
(b) a distortion without change in volume (a) elastic limit (b) endurance limit
(c) a change in volume accompanied by distortion (c) proportional limit (d) tolerance limit
(d) no change in either volume nor distortion
16. The stress at which a material fractures under large
12. Which of the following methods of design would number of reversals of stress is called (ESE-1996)
be suitable for metal structures subjected to stress (a) Endurance limit (b) Creep
reversals and impact? (c) Ultimate strength (d) Residual stress
1. Simple working stress design
2. Rigid plastic design 17. Assertion (A): A mild steel tension specimen has a
3. Semi-rigid design cup and cone fracture at failure.
4. Elastic rigid design Reason (R): Mild steel is weak in shear and failure
Select the correct answer using the codes given of the specimen in shear takes place at 450 to the
below: (ESE -1994) direction of the applied tensile force. (ESE-1996)
(a) 1,2 and 4 (b) 1,3 and 4
18. If A be the area of cross-section of a bar, the gauge
(c) 1,2 and 3 (d) 2,3 and 4
length for the measurement of ductility will be
(ESE-1998)
13. The stress-strain curve for an ideally plastic material
(a) 5.65×A1/2 (b) 5.65×A1
is (ESE-1995)
(c) 6.56×A1/2 (d) 6.56×A
(a) (b)
σ 19. Match the List –I and List –II and select the correct
σ
answer using the codes given below the lists:
Strain, ε Strain, ε
List –I
A. Ductility B. Brittleness
(c) (d) C. Tenacity D. Toughness
List-II
σ
σ 1. Failure without warning
Strain, ε 2. Drawn permanently over great changes of
Strain, ε
shape without rupture
3. Absorption of energy at high stress without
rupture
102 Solid Mechanics
4. High tensile strength (ESE-1998) 2. Decreased resistance of material to repeated

Codes: reversals of stress
A B C D A B C D 3. Material has a high probability of not failing
(a) 1 2 4 3 (b) 1 2 3 4 under reversals of stress of magnitude below
(c) 2 3 4 1 (d) 2 1 4 3 this level
4. Material continues to deform without any
20. Which one of the following pairs is NOT correctly further increase in stress. (ESE-1999)
matched? (ESE-1998) Codes:
(a) Visco-elastic material: Small plastic zone A B C D A B C D
(b) Strain hardening material: Stiffening effect felt (a) 2 1 4 3 (b) 2 1 3 4
at some stage (c) 1 2 4 3 (d) 1 2 3 4
(c) Orthotropic material: Different properties in
three perpendicular directions 23. Assertion (A): In a tensile test on a specimen, true
(d) Isotropic material: Same physical property stress in the specimen is more than the nominal
in all directions at a point stress.
Reason (R): Grip of universal testing machine
21. Match List I (Material) with List –II introduces stress concentrations. (ESE-1999)
(Characteristic) and select the correct answer
using the codes given below the lists: 24. Assertion (A): A mild steel tension specimen
List –I subjected to an axial load fails along a surface at
A. Inelastic material B. Rigid plastic material 450 to its axis
C. Ductile material D. Brittle material Reason (R): Mild steel is weaker in shear than in
List –II tension and the place of maximum shear is at 450 to
1. No plastic zone its axis. (ESE-1999)
2. Large plastic zone
3. Strain is not recovered after unloading 25. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct
4. Strain is zero upto a stress level and then stress answer using the codes given below the lists:
remains constant. (ESE-1999) List –I
Codes: A. Tenacity B. Plasticity
A B C D A B C D C. Ductility D. Malleability
(a) 3 4 2 1 (b) 3 4 1 2 List –II
(c) 4 3 2 1 (d) 4 3 1 2 1. Continues to deform without much increase of
stress
22. Match List-I (property) with List –II 2. Ultimate strength in tension
(Characteristic) and select the correct answer using 3. Extension in a direction without rupture
the codes given below the lists: 4. Ability to be drawn out by tension to a small
List –I section without rupture. (ESE-2000)
A. Fatigue B. Creep Codes:
C. Plasticity D. Endurance Limit A B C D A B C D
List –II (a) 2 1 4 3 (b) 2 1 3 4
1. Material continuous to deform with time (c) 1 2 4 3 (d) 1 2 3 4
under sustained loading
26. Creep of the gradual increase of (ESE-2001) Codes:

(a) plastic strain with time at constant load A B C D A B C D
(b) elastic strain with time at constant load (a)
3 1 2 4 (b) 4 1 2 3
(c) plastic strain with time at varying load (c)
3 4 1 2 (d) 4 3 1 2
(d) elastic strain with time at varying load
31. The material in which large deformation is possible
27. Assertion (A): The strain and stress system for a before the absolute failure or rupture is termed as
bar of length ‘L’ subjected to an axial pull will be (ESE-2003)
the same whether both ends of the bar are free or (a) Brittle (b) Elastic
one end is fixed and the other end is free. (c) Ductile (d) Plastic
Reason (R): Rigid body displacements have no
effect on the elastic deformation. (ESE-2002) 32. The stresses in concrete in a reinforced concrete
element under sustained load due to creep
28. Creep of a material is a property indicated by (ESE-2003)
(a) a time dependent strain of the material (a) Increase with time (b) decrease with time
(b) elongation of the material due to changes (c) remain unchanged (d) fluctuate
in the material properties
(c) shortening caused by shrinkage of the member 33. Some structural members subjected to long time
(d) the decrease in the volume of the material sustained loads deform progressively with time
affected by the weather conditions. especially at elevated temperatures. What is such a
phenomenon called (ESE-2008)
29. Elastic limit is the point (ESE-2003) (a) Fatigue (b) Creep
(a) upto which stress is proportional to strain (c) Creep relaxation (d) Fracture
(b) at which elongation takes place without
application of additional load 34. Assertion (A): In a tension test on a cast iron
(c) upto which if the load is removed, original specimen, the failure of the specimen is on a cross
volume and shape are regained section perpendicular to the axis of the specimen.
(d) at which the toughness is maximum Reason (R): The failure of the specimen is on a
plane subjected to maximum tensile stress and cast
30. Match List –I (Material) with List –II (Properties) iron is relatively weak in tension. (ESE-2008)
and select the correct answer using the codes given
below the Lists: (ESE-2003) 35. Assertion (A): In a tension test on a mild steel
List –I specimen, the failure of the specimen is along a
A. Isotropic plane at 450 to the cross section.
B. Homogenous Reason (R): The failure of the specimen is on a
C. Viscoelastic plane subjected to maximum shear stress and mild
D. Brittle steel is relatively weak in shear. (ESE-2008)
List- II
1. Time dependent stress-strain relation 36. What would be the shape of the failure surface of a
2. No plastic zone standard cast iron specimen subjected to torque?
3. Identical properties in all direction (ESE-2009)
4. Similar properties throughout the volume (a) Cup and cone shape at the centre
104 Solid Mechanics
(b) Plane surface perpendicular to the axis of the 42. Which of the following statements are correct?
specimen 1. In a ductile material elastic deformation is
(c) Pyramid type wedge-shaped surface more predominant than plastic one.
perpendicular to the axis of the specimen. 2. Brittleness is not an absolute property of a
(d) Helicoidal surface at 450 to the axis of the metal.
specimen. 3. Rate of loading has no influence in
changing the behaviour of a metal from
37. Assertion (A): The principle of superposition is
‘ductile’ to ‘brittle’ at low temperatures.
valid whenever the strain or stress to be obtained is
4. Under hydrostatic compression, a brittle metal
directly proportional to the applied loads.
may change into a ductile one. (ESE-2013)
Reason (R): Strain energy depends on the product
(a) 1 and 2 (b) 2 and 3
of stress and strain. (ESE-2010)
(c) 3 and 4 (d) 2 and 4'
38. Consider the following statements
1. Failure occurs beyond elastic limit. 43. The total deflection of a structure when subjected
2. Rupture takes place immediately after elastic simultaneously to different sets of loading is equal
limit to the sum of the deflections under each such set of
3. Permanent set occurs beyond elastic limit. loads as if acting separately on the structure. Which
Which of these are considered in the theories of one of the following justifies this statement?
failures? (ESE-2011) (ESE-2013)
(a) 1,2 and 3 (b) 1 and 3 only (a) Elastic limit is not exceeded
(c) 2 and 3 only (d) 1 and 2 only (b) Elastic limit including buckling is not
exceeded.
39. Consider the following salient points in a stress- (c) Limit state is not exceeded
strain curve of a mild steel bar: (d) Proportional limit without buckling is not
1. Yield point 2. Breaking point exceeded.
3. Yield plateau 4. Proportionality limit
44. Statement (I): There are two independent elastic
5. Ultimate point
constants for an isotropic material.
The correct sequence in which they occur while
Statement (II): All metals at micro-level are
testing the mild steel bar in tension from initial zero
isotropic. (ESE – 2014)
strain to failure is (ESE-2011)
Codes:
(a) 4,1,2,3 and 5 (b) 1,4,3,5 and 2
(a) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are
(c) 4,1,3,5 and 2 (d) 1,4,2,3 and 5
individually true and Statement (II) is the
40. The material in which large deformation is possible correct explanation of Statement (I)
before absolute failure by rupture takes place, is (b) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are
known as (ESE-2011) individually true but statement (II) is not the
(a) Ductile (b) Plastic correct explanation of statement (I)
(c) Brittle (d) Elastic (c) Statement (I) is true but Statement (II) is false
(d) Statement (I) is false but Statement (II) is true
41. If a material had identical elastic properties in all
directions, it is said to be (ESE-2012) 45. Statement (I):The failure surface of standard cast
(a) elastic (b) isotropic iron specimen of circular cross-section subjected to
(c) orthotropic (d) homogeneous torsion is on a helicoidal surface at 450 to its axis.
Statement (II): The failure occurs on a plane of the

KEY & Detailed Solutions
specimen subjected to maximum tensile stress, and
cast iron is weak in tension. (ESE – 2014) 01. (a) 02. (a) 03. (a) 04. (b) 05. (a)
06. (c) 07. (c) 08. (d) 09. (a) 10. (b)
46. In mild steel specimens subjected to tensile test 11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (b)
cycle, the elastic limit in tension is raised and the 16. (a) 17. (a) 18. (a) 19. (d) 20. (a)
elastic limit in compression is lowered. This is 21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (a) 25. (a)
called (ESE-2017) 26. (a) 27. (b) 28. (a) 29. (c) 30. (c)
(a) Annealing effect (b) Bauschinger effect 31. (c) 32. (c) 33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (a)
(c) Strain rate effect (d) Fatigue effect 36. (d) 37. (b) 38. (b) 39. (c) 40. (a)
41. (b) 42. (c) 43. (d) 44. (b) 45. (a)
47. The stress-strain curve for an ideally plastic materials
46. (b) 47. (a)
is (ESE – 2018)

(a) 01. Ans: (a)
Stress
Sol: In compression test on mild steel/buckling occurs
Strain ( no neck formation)
• Hooke’s law is valid for both tension as well as
(b) Stress
in compression also.
• Hooke’s law is not valid beyond yielding.
Strain • Strength in compression is slightly lower
than strength in tension due to buckling effect
in bars. If buckling is prevented strength in
(c) Stress compression is equal to strength in tension.
Strain 02. Ans: (a)

Sol: Cracks in brittle material propagate and lead to
(d) failure.
Stress
Yielding is a phenomenon for permanent set for
Strain tension as well as compression.
03. Ans: (a)

Sol: Creep occurs at constant stress with time.
The only option related to time is (a)
04. Ans: (b)

Sol: Endurance limit of carbon steel will be around 0.5.
Endurance Limit/Fatigue strength:
The highest stress that a material can withstand for
a definite number of stress cycles before breaking.

Chapter 2 Simple Stresses and Strains
01. For engineering materials, Poisson’s ratio lies D E
between (ESE-1992)
Cu St 1m
(a) 0 and 1 (b) −1 and +1
A B F
1 1 1 C
(c) − 2 and + 2 (d) 0 and 2
1t
1m 1m
02. Assertion (A): Young’s modulus E for most of the
engineering materials is generally more than shear (a) 0.5 (b) 4 (c) 0.25 (d)2
modulus.
Reason (R): E = 2 G (1 + µ), where µ is Poisson’s 06. A mild steel bar is in three parts, each 20 cm long.
ratio. (ESE -1992) The diameters of part AB, BC and CD are 2 cm,
1 cm and 3 cm respectively. The bar is subjected to
Codes: an axial pull of 4t as shown in the given figure. If
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct E = 2 × 106 kg/cm2 and the elongation in the three
explanation of A parts of the bar are ∆1, ∆2 and ∆3 respectively,
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not a correct then the ratio of the greatest to the least of these
explanation of A elongations will be (ESE -1993)
(c) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false but R is true 4t 2 cm 1 cm 3 cm 4t
A B C D
03. Assertion (A): For plastic strains of a metallic
20 cm 20 cm 20 cm
material, there is a negligible change of volume.
Reason (R): Poisson’s ratio is nearly 0.5 (a) 9 (b) 4 (c) 3 (d) 2
(ESE -1992)
07. A steel bar of 2 m length is fixed at both ends at

200C. The coefficient of thermal expansion is 11 ×
04. A steel cable of 2 cm diameter is used to lift a load
106/0C and the modulus of elasticity is 2 × 106 kg/
of 500 π kg. Given that, E = 2 × 106 kg/cm2 and the
cm2. If the temperature is changed to 180C, then the
length of the cable is 10 m. Elongation of the cable
bar will experience a stress of (ESE -1993)
due to the load will be (ESE -1993)
(a) 22 kg/cm (tensile)
2
(a) 0.5 cm (b) 0.25 cm (c) 1 cm (d) 2/π cm
(b) 22 kg/cm2 (compressive)
(c) 44 kg/cm2 (compressive)
05. ABC is a rigid bar. It is hinged at A and suspended
(d) 44 kg/cm2 (tensile)
at B and C by two wires BD and CE made of
copper and steel respectively, as shown in the given 08. Consider the following statements:
figure. The bar carries a load of 1 t at F, mid-way The principle of superposition is applied to
between B and C. Given, Ac = 4 cm2 ; As = 2 cm2 ; 1. Linear elastic bodies
Ec = 1 × 106 kg/cm2, Es = 2 × 106 kg/cm2 Ps is the 2. Bodies subjected to small deformations
force in the steel wire and Pc is the force in the Of these statements: (ESE -1993)
copper wire, the ratio (Pc/Ps) will be (ESE -1993) (a) 1 alone is correct (b) 1 and 2 are correct
(c) 2 alone is correct (d) Neither 1 nor 2 is correct
110 Solid Mechanics
09. An elastic body is subjected to direct compressive 14. A solid cube is subjected to normal forces of equal
stress Px in the longitudinal direction. If the lateral magnitude along three mutually perpendicular
strains in the other two directions are prevented by directions, one of which has an opposite nature
applying Py and Pz in those directions, then Py = Pz is as compared to the remaining two forces. The
equal to (µ is the Poisson’s ratio) (ESE -1993) volumetric strain of the cube is equal to(ESE-1994)
Px (a) its linear strain
(a) (b) µPx
_µ − 1 i (b) twice the linear strain
Px µPx (c) thrice the linear strain
(c) (d)
7_µ + 1 i µA _1 − µ i (d) its shear strain
15. A bar 4 cm in diameter is subjected to an axial load

10. A prismatic bar of volume ‘V’ is subjected to a of 4 t. The extension of the bar over a gauge length
compressive force in the longitudinal direction. If of 20 cm is 0.03 cm. The decrease in diameter is
the Poisson’s ratio of the material of the bar is µ and 0.0018 cm. The poisson’s ratio is (ESE-1994)
the longitudinal strain is ‘e’ then the final volume of (a) 0.25 (b) 0.30 (c) 0.33 (d) 0.35
the bar will be (ESE -1993)
(a) (1 + e) (1−µe)2 V (b) (1−e2) (1 + µe) V 16. A rod shown in the given figure is such that the
lower part is made of steel and the upper part is
(c) (1 + e) (1 + µe)2 V (d) (1−e) (1 + µe)2 V
made of copper. Both the ends of the rod are rigidly
11. An elastic bar of length ‘L’, cross-sectional area A, clamped. If an axial force P is applied at the junction
young’s modulus of elasticity E and self-weight W is of the two metals, given that the ratio. Esteel / Ecopper is
hanging vertically. It is subjected to a load P applied equal to 2, the force in copper rod would be
axially at the bottom end. The total elongation of (ESE -1994)
the bar is given by (ESE -1993)
2L/3
WL PL WL PL Cu
(a) AE + AE (b) 2AE + AE
P
WL PL WL PL St L/3
(c) 2AE + 2AE (d) AE + 2AE

12. A thin circular plate of radius r and thickness (a) P/5 (tension) (b) P/3 (tension)
t is subjected to radial stress σ throughout its (c) P/3 (compression) (d) P/5 (compression)
circumference. The unit volume change of the
entire plate is (ESE-1994) 17. A compound bar consisting of material A and B is
tightly secured with rigid supports at the ends. The
(a) E _1 − µ i (b) E _1 − µ i
σ 2σ
coefficient thermal expansion of A is more than that
of B. When the temperature is increased the stresses
(c) E _1 − 2µ i (d) E _1 − 2µ i
σ 2σ
induced will be (ESE-1994)
(a) tensile in both the materials
13. If all the dimensions of a prismatic bar elongating
(b) tensile in material A and compressive in
under its own weight are increased in the proportion
material B
m:1, then total elongation will increase in the ratio
(c) compressive in material A and tensile in
(ESE-1994)
material B
(a) m:1 (b) m :1 2
(c) m :1 (d) m4:1
3
(d) compressive in both the materials
111 Simple Stress and Strains
18. A mild steel bar is 40 cm long. The lengths of parts Reason (R): The diameter of the conical bar at the
AB and BC of the bar 20 cm each. It is loaded as base and the length are the same as those of the
shown in the given figure. The ratio of the stresses cylindrical bar. (ESE -1994)
σ1 in part AB to σ2 in part BC is (ESE -1994)
P1=1000 kg, P2 =1000 kg 21. Given that for an element in a body of homogeneous
isotropic material subjected to plane stresses εx, εy
A and εz are normal strains in x, y and z directions
respectively and µ is the Poisson’s ratio, the
dia=2 cm 20 cm
magnitude of unit volume change of the element is
B given by (ESE-1995)
P1
dia=1 cm 20 cm (a) εx+εy+εz (b) εx−µ(εy+εz)
C (c) µ(εx+εy+εz) (d) (1/εx) +(1/εy)+(1/εz)

P2
22. A solid metal bar of uniform diameter D and length

(a) 2 (b) 0.5 (c) 4 (d) 0.25
L is hang vertically from a ceiling. If the density
of the material of the bar is 'p' and the modulus of
19. A single direct stress P acts along the longitudinal
elasticity is E, then the total elongation of the bar
(x-axis) of a bar of rectangular cross-section.
due to its own weight is (ESE-1995)
E is the Young’s modulus and 1/m is the

Poisson’s ratio of the material. Match List-I pL pL2
(a) 2E (b) 2E
with List-II and select the correct answer using
the codes given below the lists: (ESE -1994) pE pE
(c) 2L (d)
List – I 2L2
A. Strain along the x-axis
23. A rigid beam ABCD is hinged at D and supported
B. Strain along the y-axis
by two springs at A and B as shown in the figure.
C. Strain energy per unit volume
The beam carries a vertical load P at C. The stiffness
D. Volumetric Strain
of spring at A is 2K and that of B is K. The ratio of
List –II
forces of spring at A and that of spring at B is
1. P/mE 2. P/E (ESE-1995)
3. E b1 − m
2 l
P
4. P2/2E
Codes:
A B C D A B C D A B C D
(a) 1 2 3 4 (b) 1 2 4 3
(c) 2 1 3 4 (d) 2 1 4 3 a a a
P
20. Assertion (A): The elongation of a conical bar
under the action of its weight is one third that of a (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4
cylindrical bar of the same material under the action
of its weight (density per unit volume for both is the
same).
112 Solid Mechanics
24. A steel cube of volume 8000 cc is subjected to all 29. If E=2.06×105 N/mm2, an axial pull of 60 kN
round stress of 1330 kg/cm2. The bulk modulus of suddenly applied to a steel rod 50 mm in diameter
the material is 1.33×106 kg/cm2. The volumetric and 4 m long. Causes an instantaneous elongation
change is (ESE-1995) of the order of (ESE-1995)
(a) 8 cc (b) 6 cc (c) 0.8 cc (d) 10−3 cc (a) 1.19 mm (b) 2.19 mm
(c) 3.19 mm (d) 11.9 mm
25. In terms of bulk modulus (K) and modulus of
rigidity (C), the Poisson’s ratio can be expressed as
30. A bar of circular cross-section varies uniformly
(ESE-1995)
from a cross section 2D to D. If extension of the bar
3K − 4C 3K + 4C
(a) (b) is calculated treating it as a bar of average diameter,
6K + 4C 6K − 4C
then the percentage error will be (ESE-1996)
3K − 2C 3K + 2C
(c) (d) (a) 10 (b) 25 (c) 33.33 (d) 50
6K + 2C 6K − 2C
26. Two bars one of material A and the other of material 31. The length, coefficient of thermal expansion and
B of same length are tightly secured between two Young’s modulus of bar ‘A’ are twice that of bar ‘B’
unyielding walls in series. Coefficient of thermal if the temperature of both bars is increased by the
expansion of bar A is more than that of B. same amount while preventing any expansion, then
When temperature rises, the stresses induced are the ratio of stress developed in bar A to that in bar B
(ESE-1995) will be (ESE-1996)
(a) tension in both the materials (a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 8 (d) 16
(b) tension in material A and compression in
material B 32. The side AD of the square block ABCD as shown in
(c) compression in material A and tension in the given figure is fixed at the base and it is under
material B a state of simple shear causing shear stress τ and
(d) compression in both the materials shear strain φ, where
27. A column of height ‘H’ and area at top ‘A’ has the φ = τ/Modulus of rigidity ‘G’. The distorted shape
same strength throughout its length, under its own is AB′CD′. The diagonal strain (linear) will be
weight and applied stress ‘ρo’ at the top. Density of (ESE-1996)
B Β′ C C′
column material is ρ. To satisfy the above condition, τ
the area of the column at the bottom should be
(ESE-1995) τ

A.e A.e - tH
(a) ρ o (b) ρ o A D
A.ρ H φ
(c) A.e - tH/t (d) (a) φ/2 (b) (c) φ 2 (d) φ
2
o
e to
28. In bar of diameter 30 mm is subjected to a tensile 33. If all the dimensions of a prismatic bar of square
load such that the measure extension on a gauge cross-section suspended freely from the ceiling of a
length of 200 mm is 0.09 mm and the change in roof are doubled then the total elongation produced
diameter is 0.0045 mm. The Poisson’s ratio will be by its own weight will increase (ESE-1996)
(ESE-1995) (a) eight times (b) four times
(a) 1/4 (b) 1/3 (c) 1/4.5 (d) 1/2 (c) three times (d) two times
34. Consider the following statements:

(a) 10π b 25 + 16 l (b) 25π b 25 + 16 l
1 1 1 2 1 1
1. In a member subjected to uniaxial tensile force
the maximum normal stress is the external
(c) 10π b 25 + 16 l (d) 10π b 25 + 16 l
1 1 1 2 1 1
load divided by the maximum cross-sectional
area.
2. When the structural member is subjected to 39. A copper bar of 25 cm length is fixed by means
uniaxial loading, the shear stress is zero on a of supports at its ends. Supports can yield (total)
plane where the normal stress is maximum. by 0.01 cm. If the temperature of the bar is raised
3. In a member subjected to uni-axial loading, by 1000C, then the stress induced in the bar for
the normal stress on the planes of maximum αc = 20×10−6/ 0C and Ec = 1× 106 kg/cm2 will be
shear stress is less than the maximum. (ESE-1997)
Of these statements (ESE-1996) (a) 2×10 kg/cm
2 2
(b) 4×10 kg/cm2
2
(a) 1 and 2 are correct (b) 1 and 3 are correct (c) 8×10 kg/cm
2 2
(d)16×102 kg/cm2
(c) 2 and 3 are correct (d) 1,2 and 3 are correct
40. A given material has Young’s modulus E, modulus
35. Assertion (A): Strain is a fundamental behaviour of of rigidity G and Poisson’s ratio 0.25. The ratio if
the material, while the stress is a derived concept. Young’s modulus to modulus of rigidity of this
Reason (R): Strain does not have a unit while the material is (ESE-1997)
stress has a unit. (ESE-1996) (a) 3.75 (b) 3 (c) 2.5 (d) 1.5
36. Assertion (A): The amount of elastic deformation
at a certain point, which an elastic body undergoes, 41. A prismatic bar of uniform cross-sectional area of
under given stress is the same irrespective of the 5 cm2 is subjected to axial loads as shown in the
stresses being tensile or compressive. given figure.
Reason (R): The modulus of elasticity and Poisson’s A
1m
B
2m
C
1m
D
ratio are assumed to be the same in tension as well

as compression. (ESE-1996) 3000 kg 2000 kg 10000 kg 5000 kg
37. A rigid bar is supported by a spring as shown in the

given figure. The deflection of the point B will be Portion BC is subjected to an axial stress of
(ESE-1996) (ESE-1997)
500 N (a) 400 kg/cm tension
2
k=50 N/mm
(b) 2000 kg/cm2 compression
B
(c) 1000 kg/cm2 tension
A
(d) 600 kg/cm2 tension
L L
(a) 10 mm upward (b) 20 mm downward 42. Two wires of equal length are suspended vertically
(c) 5 mm upward (d) 40 mm down ward at a distance of 40 cm as shown in the below figure.
Their upper ends are fixed to the ceiling while their
38. A round steel bar of overall length 40 cm consists of
lower ends support a rigid horizontal bar which
two equal portion of 20 cm each having diameters of
carries a central load of 1 t midway between the
10 cm and 8 cm respectively. If the rod is subjected
wires. Details of the two wires are given below:
to a tensile load of 10 tones, the elongation will be
given. By (ESE-1997)
114 Solid Mechanics
Modulus of 45. A mild steel bar is in two parts having equal lengths.
Wire Area The area of cross-section of part-1 is double that of
Material Elasticity Elongation
No. (cm2) part-2. If the bar carries an axial load P, then the
(Kg/cm2)
Copper 1×106 ∆c ratio of elongation in part-1 to that in part-2 will
1 4
be (ESE-1998)
2 2 Steel 2×10 6
∆s
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 1/2 (d) 1/4

40 cm
46. Assertion (A): A bar tapers from a diameter of d1
to a diameter of d2 over its length L and is subjected
to a tensile force P. If extension is calculated based
1 2 4 cm on treating it as a bar of average diameter, the
calculated extension will be more than the actual
extension.
Reason (R): The actual extension in such bars is
4P L
1t given by, T = πd d E (ESE-1998)
1 2
The ratio of the elongation of the two wires, Ac/As is

47. A round bar made of same material consists of
(ESE-1997)
3 parts each of 100 mm length having diameters
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.5 (c) 2 (d) 1
of 40 mm, 50 mm, and 60 mm, respectively. If the
bar is subjected to an axial load of 10 kN, the total
43. A composite section shown in the figure below was
elongation of the bar would be (E is the modulus of
formed at 200C and was made of two materials A
elasticity in kN/mm2) (ESE-1999)
and B. If the coefficient of thermal expansion of A
is greater than that of B and the composite section
(a) πE b 16 + 25 + 36 l mm
0.4 1 1 1
is heated to 400C, then A and B will
(ESE-1998)
(b) πE b 16 + 25 + 36 l mm
4 1 1 1
(c) πE b 16 + 25 + 36 l mm
4 2 1 1 1
A L B
(d) πE b 16 + 25 + 36 l mm
40 1 1 1
Rigid bar
(a) be in tension and compression respectively

48. If a member is subjected to tensile stress of px,
(b) both be in compression
compressive stress of py, and tensile stress of pz,
(c) both be in tension
along the x,y and z direction respectively, then the
(d) be in compression and tension respectively
resultant strain ex along the x direction would be
(E is young’s modulus of elasticity, µ is poisson’r
44. In an experiment, it is found that the bulk modulus
ratio) (ESE-1999)
of a material is equal to its shear modulus. The
Poison’s ratio is (ESE-1998)
(a) E _ p x + µp y − µp z i (b) E _ p x + µp y + µp z i
1 1
(a) 0.125 (b) 0.250 (c) 0.375 (d) 0.500
(c) E _ p x − µp y + p z i (d) E _ p x − µp y − µp z i
1 1
49. A steel bar, 300 mm long and 24 mm diameter, is 53. Match List – I (Elastic constant) with List –II
turned down to 18 mm diameter for one third of its (Definition) and select the correct answer using the
length. It is heated 300C above room temperature, codes given below the lists: (ESE-2000)
clamped at both ends, then allowed to cool to room List-I
temperature. If the distance between the clamps is A. Young’s Modulus B. Poisson’s ratio
unchanged, the maximum stress in the bar C. Bulk modulus D. Rigidity modulus
(α = 12.5×10-6 per0 C and E = 200 GN/m2) is List –II
(ESE-2000) 1. lateral strain to linear strain within elastic limit
(a) 25 MN/m 2
(b) 50 MN/m2 2. stress to strain within elastic limit
(c) 75 MN/m2 (d) 100 MN/m2 3. shear stress to shear strain within elastic limit
4. direct stress to corresponding volumetric strain
50. A rigid beam CBDA is hinged at A and supported Codes:
by two springs at C and B with a vertical load ‘P’ at A B C D A B C D
point D as shown in the given figure. The ratio of (a) 3 1 4 2 (b) 2 1 4 3
stiffness (k2/k1) of springs at B and C is 2. the ratio (c) 2 4 1 3 (d) 3 4 1 2
of forces in spring at C to that at B is (ESE-2000)
54. For a linear, elastic, isotropic material, the number
of independent elastic constants is (ESE-2000)
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4
1m 1m 1m
C D A 55. The bulk modulus of elasticity of a material is twice

B
its modulus of rigidity. The Poisson’s ratio of the
material is (ESE-01)
(a) b 4 l (c) b 3 l
3 4
(b) 1 (d) 2
1 2 3 4
(a) 7 (b) 7 (c) 7 (d) 7
51. A bar of uniform section is subjected to axial
tensile loads such that the normal strain in the axial 56. Assertion (A): Normal stress of one nature
direction is 1.25 mm per m. If the Poisson’s ratio of (compressive or tensile) acting along one of the
the material of the bar is 0.3, the volumetric strain three orthogonal axes of a member will produce
would be (ESE-2000) strains of the same nature in its direction and strains
(a) 2×10−4 (b) 3×10−4 of opposite nature along the other two directions.
(c) 4×10−4 (d) 5×10−4 Reasons (R): Sum of the strains along the three
orthogonal axes equals volumetric strain.
52. A square plate (a × a) rigidly held at three edges is
free to move along the fourth edge. If temperature
57. A rigid bar AC is supported by three rods of same
of the plate is raised by temperature ‘t’, then the free
material and of equal diameter. The bar AC is
expansion at the fourth edge will be (coefficient of
initially horizontal a force P is applied such that the
thermal expansion of the material is α, modulus of
bar AC continues to remain horizontal. Forces in
elasticity of the material is E and its Poisson’s ratio
each of the shorter bars and in the longer bar are,
is v) (ESE-2000)
respectively (ESE-2003)
(a) aα t v (b) a αt(1+v)
(c) a bαt + αEtv l (d) aαt(1−v)
116 Solid Mechanics
500 N
A B
2L1
L1 L1
a a K=200 N/m
A C 100 mm 100 mm
P (a) 25mm (b) 20mm
(a) 0.4 P, 0.2 P (b) 0.3 P, 0.4 P (c) 15mm (d) 10mm
(c) 0.2 P, 0.6 P (d) 0.5 P, zero
60. A mild steel bar of square cross-section 40 mm ×
58. A brass bar of solid section is encased in a steel tube 40 mm is 400 mm long. It is subjected to a
as shown in the diagram below. longitudinal tensile stress of 440N/mm2 and lateral
compressive stress of 200 N/mm2 in perpendicular
direction. E = 2 × 105 N/mm2, µ = 0.3. What is the
Steel approximate elongation of the bar in the longitudinal
direction ? (ESE-2005)
Brass
(a) 0.44mm (b) 0.88mm
(c) 0.22mm (d) 1mm
Steel
L 61. If the Young’s modulus ‘E’ is equal to the bulk

modulus ‘K’, then what is the value of the Poisson’s
The coefficient of expansion of steel is ratio? (ESE-2005)
11.2 × 10-6 per 0C and the coefficient of expansion (a) 1/4 (b) 1/2 (c) 1/3 (d) 3/4
of brass is 16.5 × 10-6 per 0C. The composite bar is
heated through 600C. Now consider the following 62. Three wires of steel 1, 2 and 3, each having area
statements: A support a load W as shown in the figure below.
1. The stress in the brass will be tensile. What is the ratio of load carried by outer wires to
2. The stress in the steel will be tensile. middle wire? (ESE-2006)
3. The stress in the steel will be compressive.
4. The stress in the brass will be
compressive.
1 3 L
Which of these statements are correct ? (ESE-2004)
L/2
(a) 1 and 2 (b) 1 and 3 2
(c) 2 and 4 (d) 2 and 3
59. A rigid bar AB is supported by a spring as shown

in the diagram below. What is the deflection of the W
point B? (ESE-2004)
(a) 2:1 (b) 1:2 (c) 1:2.5 (d) 1:3
63. If G is the modulus of rigidity, E is the modulus of (a) 250 GN/m2 (b) 320 GN/m2
elasticity and µ is the Poisson’s ratio for a material, (c) 125 GN/m2 (d) 80 GN/m2
then what is the expression for G? (ESE-2006)
69. A stepped column carries loads as shown below.
3E 5E What is the maximum normal stress in the column
(a) G = (b) G =
2 _1 + 2µ i _1 + µ i at B in the larger diameter column? (ESE-2008)
E E P
(c) G = (d) G =
2 _1 + µ i _1 + 2µ i
A
P L.A
64. A bar of 40mm diameter and 400mm length is
subjected to an axial load of 100 kN. It elongates by
0.150mm and the diameter decreases by 0.005mm. B L.1.5.A
What is the Poisson’s ratio of the material of the
bar? (ESE-2006) C
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.28 (c) 0.33 (d) 0.37 P P 2P 2P
(a) 1.5A (b) A (c) 1.5A (d) A
65. If p1 and p2 are the principal stresses at a point in
a strained material with Young’s modulus E and
70. A composite system where the components are of
Poisson’s ratio 1/m, then what is the principal
equal lengths is subjected to temperature rise. Which
strain? (ESE-2006)
p1 + p 2 p1 − p 2 one of the following stresses will be developed in
(a) mE (b) mE
the component having highest coefficient of linear
p1 p2 p1 p2 expansion? (ESE-2008)
(c) E − mE (d) E + mE
(a) Compressive stress (b) Tensile stress
(c) Shear stress (d) Zero stress
66. What is the correct sequence of the following metals
in the decreasing order of their Poisson’s ratio?
71. What is the nature of stress in a ceiling fan rod?
1. Aluminum 2. Cast iron 3. Steel
(ESE-2008)
Select the correct answer using the codes given
(a) Bending (b) Tensile
below: (ESE-2007)
(c) Compressive (d) Shear
(a) 1-2-3 (b) 2-1-3 (c) 1-3-2 (d) 3-1-2
72. A compounded bar consists of material A encased
67. A steel rod, 100mm long is held between two rigid
in material B. It is tightly secured at the ends. The
supports. It is heated by 200C. If the coefficient
coefficient of thermal expansion of A is more than
of thermal expansion of the material of the rod
that of B. If the temperature of the bar is increased,
is 15×10–6 per 0C and modulus of elasticity is
the stresses induced will be (ESE-2008)
200×103 MN/m2, what is the stress in the rod?
(a) tensile in both materials
(ESE-2007)
(b) compressive in both materials
(a) 20MN/m2 (b) 40MN/m2
(c) tensile in material B and compressive in
(c) 60MN/m2 (d) 80MN/m2
material A
(d) compressive in material B and tensile in
68. The value of modulus of elasticity for a material is
material A
200GN/m2 and Poisson’s ratio is 0.25. What is its
modulus of rigidity ? (ESE-2008)
118 Solid Mechanics
73. A solid metal bar of uniform sectional area 79. Poisson’s ratio is defined as the ratio of (ESE-2010)
throughout its length hangs vertically from its (a) Longitudinal stress and longitudinal strain
upper end. Details of the bar are: length = 6m, (b) Lateral strain and longitudinal strain
material density = 8 × 10–5 N/mm3 and E = 2×105 (c) Longitudinal stress and lateral stress
N/mm2. What will be the total elongation of the bar (d) Lateral stress and longitudinal stress
in mm? (ESE-2009)
80. A prismatic bar ABC is subjected to an axial load of
288 48 144 72
(a) (b) (c) (d) 25 kN; the reactions RA and RC will be
10 4 10 4 10 4 10 4
(ESE-2010)
74. A circular rod of diameter 30mm and length 200mm A B
C
is subjected to a tensile force. The extension in rod
is 0.09mm and change in diameter is 0.0045mm.
+25 kN
What is the Poisson’s ratio of the material of the
rod? (ESE-2009) RA RC
(a) 0.30 (b) 0.32 (c) 0.33 (d) 0.35
2L 3L
75. For a material having modulus of elasticity equal to (a) RA = –10 kN and Rc = –15 kN
208GPa and Poisson’s ratio equal to 0.3, what is the (b) RA = 10 kN and Rc = – 35 kN
modulus of rigidity? (ESE-2009) (c) RA = – 15 kN and Rc = – 10 kN
(a) 74.0 GPa (b) 80.0 GPa (b) RA = 15 kN and Rc = – 40 kN
(c) 100.0 GPa (d) 128.5GPa
81. Assertion (A): A material is incompressible if its
76. Given E as the Young’s modulus of elasticity of a
Poisson’s ratio is 0.5.
material, what can be the minimum value of its bulk
Reason (R): The Bulk modulus K is related to
modulus of elasticity? (ESE-2009)
Modulus of elasticity E and to Poisson’s ratio µ as
E E E E
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 5 per well known relationship. (ESE-2011)
77. A mild steel bar of square cross-section 25mm × 82. The compatibility conditions in terms of strain in a
25mm is 1m long. It is subjected to bi-axial stress two- dimensional problem are associated with
σx = 480 N/mm2 (tension) and σy = 400 N/mm2 (ESE-2011)
(compression). (a) Stresses (b) Forces
E = 2 × 105N/mm2, µ = 0.3, what is the elongation (c) Properties of materials (d) Deformations
of the bar in mm in x direction? (ESE-2009)
(a) 1.0 (b) 1.5 (c) 2.0 (d) 3.0 83. Two circular mild steel bars A and B of equal
lengths l have diameters dA = 2 cm and dB = 3 cm.
78. A mild steel rod tapers uniformly from 30mm Each is subjected to a tensile load of magnitude P.
diameter to 12mm diameter in a length of 300mm. The ratio of the elongations of the bars lA / lB is
The rod is subjected to an axial load of 12 kN. (ESE-2012)
E = 2 × 105 N/mm2. What is the extension of the rod
in mm? (ESE-2009) 2
(a) 3
3
(b) 4
4
(c) 9
9
(d) 4

4π 2 π 1
(a) 5 (b) 5π (c) 5 (d) 5π
84. A mild steel rod tapers uniformly from 24 mm dia. 89. A metal bar of 10 mm diameter when subjected to a
to 12 mm dia. over its length of 400 mm. The rod pull of 23.5 kN gave an elongation of 0.3 mm on a
when held vertical is subjected to an axial tensile gauge length of 200 mm. The Young’s modulus of
load of 12kN. E =2×105 N/mm2. The extension of elasticity of the metal will nearly be (ESE – 2014)
the rod in mm would be (ESE-2013) (a) 200 kN/mm2 (b) 300 kN/mm2
(c) 360 kN/mm2 (d) 400 kN/mm2
3π 2 π 1
(a) 2 (b) 3π (c) 3 (d) 3π
90. A steel rod, 2 m in length, 40 mm in diameter, is
85. Poisson’s ratio of a material is 0.3. Then the ratio of subjected to a pull of 70 kN as shown in the figure
Young’s modulus to bulk modulus is
(ESE-2013) 70 kN 70 kN
(a) 0.6 (b) 0.8 (c) 1.2 (d) 1.4
2m
86. The relationship between Young’s Modulus E, To what length should the bar be bored centrally
Modulus of Rigidity C and Bulk modulus K in an from one end so that total extension will increase
elastic material is given by the relation by 20% under the same force (the bore diameter is
(ESE-2013) 25 mm and E is 2×105 N/mm2)? (ESE – 2014)
9 KC 3 KC
(a) E = (b) E = (a) 0.46 m (b) 0.55 m
3K + C 3K + C
(c) 0.87 m (d) 0.62 m
9KC 3KC
(c) E = (d) E =
9K + C 9K + C 91. A member ABCD is subjected to a force system as
shown in the figure
87. Statement (I): In simple bending, strain in the bent
beam varies linearly across the beam depth. A B C D
Statement (II): As per Hooke’s law within elastic 365
45 450 130
limit, the stress is proportional to the strain.
(ESE – 2014) The resistive force in the part BC is (ESE – 2014)
Codes: (a) 365 (compressive) (b) 450 (tensile)
(a) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are (c) 85 (compressive) (d) 320 (compressive)
individually true and Statement (II) is the
correct explanation of Statement (I) 92. A mechanism shown in the figure consists of equally
(b) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are long steel and copper wires which carry the applied
individually true but statement (II) is not the load in equal shares. What shall be the ratio of the
correct explanation of statement (I) diameter of the copper wire to that of the steel wire,
(c) Statement (I) is true but Statement (II) is false when both the wires undergo equal strains?
(d) Statement (I) is false but Statement (II) is true (ESE – 2015)

Steel wire Copper wire
88. If the Poisson’s ratio for a material is 0.5, then the
ES= 200 GPa ES=100 Gpa
elastic modulus for the material is (ESE – 2014)
(a) three times its shear modulus
(b) four times its shear modulus
(c) equal to its shear modulus
1 1
(d) not determinable (a) 2 (b) 1.0 (c) (d) 2
2
120 Solid Mechanics
93. For a given elastic material, the Elastic Modulus E

D
is 210 GPa and its Poisson’s Ratio is 0.27. What is
the approximate value of its Modulus of Rigidity?
(ESE – 2015)
(a) 105 GPa (b) 83 GPa
L
(c) 159 GPa (d) 165 GPa
94. Lead, as a material used in construction, has

E = 15 GPa and K = 50 GPa. What is its Poisson’s (a) 1.50 × 10–6 mm (b) 1.67 × 10–6 mm
Ratio? (ESE – 2015) (c) 1.71 × 10–6 mm (d) 1.87 × 10–6 mm
(a) 0.225 (b) 0.30 (c) 0.40 (d) 0.45
98. A cubical element of a structural part made of mild
95. For a block with Young’s Modulus of its material steel is subjected to a tri-axial compressive stress as
being 210 GPa and its Poisson’s Ratio being 0.25, shown in the figure. The vertical compressive stress
when subjected to a stress system as shown in the is σ1. The Modulus of Elasticity and Poisson’s
figure, what is the magnitude of the stress σ for no Ratio are E and µ, respectively. What should be the
strain along AB? (ESE – 2015) uniform lateral pressure σ2 in terms of σ1 and µ, so
σ that lateral strain is prevented? (ESE – 2015)
σ1
60 N/mm2 60 N/mm2 σ2
A B
σ
σ2
(a) 30 N/mm2 (b) 60 N/mm2
σ2
(c) 120 N/mm2 (d) 240 N/mm2
96. Statement (I): The failure surface of an axially

loaded mild steel tension specimen of circular σ2
cross-section is along a plane at 45o to the axis of σ1
the specimen.
Statement (II): The failure occurs on a plane of the µ µ
(a) σ1 (b) σ1
specimen subjected to maximum shear stress and −
1 µ _1 + µ i_1 − µ i
mild steel is relatively weak in shear. µ 1+µ
(c) + σ1 (d) − σ1
(ESE – 2015) 1 µ 1 µ
99. The longitudinal strain of a cylindrical bar of 25 mm

97. A solid conical bar of circular cross-section is diameter and 1.5 m length is found to be 3 times its
suspended vertically as shown in the figure. The lateral strain in a tensile test. What is the value of
diameter of the bar at the base, D, equals 100 mm Bulk Modulus by assuming E=1×105N/mm2 ?
and its length, L, is 0.5 m. If E = 200 GN/m2 and its (ESE – 2016)
weight per unit volume is 80 kN/m3, the elongation (a) 2×105N/mm2 (b) 1.1×105N/mm2
of the bar under self-weight is (ESE – 2015) (c) 1.1×105N/mm2 (d) 2.1×105N/mm2
100. For an elastic material, Poisson’s ratio is m, Modulus 104. Which one of the following represents ‘constitutive
of Elasticity is E, Modulus of Rigidity is C and Bulk relationship’? (ESE – 2016)
Modulus is K. µ is expressible in terms of K and C (a) Vertical displacements in a structure
as (ESE – 2016) (b) Rotational displacements in a structure
6K − 2C 6K + 2C (c) System of forces in equilibrium
(a) (b)
3K − 2C 3K − 2C (d) Stress-strain behaviour of a material
3K − 2C 3K + 2C
(c) + (d)
6K 2C 6K + 2C 105. Two similar bars of steel and Aluminium are heated
to a same temperature. Forces are applied at the ends
101. A mild steel bar of length 450 mm tapers uniformly.
of the bars to maintain their lengths unaltered. If the
The diameters at the ends are 36 mm and 18 mm,
ratio of Young’s modulii of Steel and Aluminium
respectively. An axial load of 12 kN is applied on
is 3, and the ratio of the coefficients of thermal
the bar. E=2×105N/mm2 . The elongation of the bar
expansion of steel to that of Aluminium is 0.5, what
will be (ESE – 2016)
is the stress on the Aluminium bar if the stress on
1 1 the Steel bar is 100 MPa? (ESE – 2016)
(a) 3π mm (b) 6π mm
(a) 16.7 MPa (b) 66.7 MPa
3π 2
(c) 2 mm (d) 3π mm (c) 136.7 MPa (d) 150.0 MPa
102. Which of the following statements are correct? 106. A mild steel bar, 1.5 m long , has a square section
1. Strain in the direction of applied stress is 40 mm × 40 mm .The bar is subjected to a two-
known as longitudinal strain. dimensional stress, σx= 310 N/mm2 (tensile) and
2. Tensile stress results in tensile strain in linear σy = 300 N/mm2 (compressive). E= 2×105 N/mm2,
and lateral directions Poisson’s ratio µ=0.3 The elongation of the bar in
3. Strains in all directions perpendicular to the the direction of σx will be (ESE – 2016)
applied stress are known as lateral strain. (a) 1.25 mm (b) 1.75 mm
4. Ratio of change in volume to original volume (c) 2.25 mm (d) 3 mm
is known as volumetric strain. (ESE – 2016)
(a) 1, 2 and 3 only (b) 1, 3 and 4 only 107. What is the stress at the section x- x for the bar
(c) 3 and 4 only (d) 1, 2, 3 and 4 ABCD with uniform cross-section 1000 mm2 ?
(ESE – 2017)
103. Consider the following statements: A X C D
B
1. In the infinitesimal strain theory, dilatation is
taken as an invariant. 60 kN 20 kN 30 kN 110 kN
2. Dilatation is not proportional to the algebraic

sum of all normal stresses. X
3. The shearing modulus is always less than the (a) 20 N/mm2 (Tensile)
elastic modulus. (b) 30 N/mm2 (Compressive)
Which of the above statements is/are correct? (c) 80 N/mm2 (Tensile)
(ESE – 2016) (d) 50 N/mm2 (Compressive)
(a) 1 only (b) 1 and 2 only
(c) 2 only (d) 1, 2 and 3
122 Solid Mechanics
108. The total elongation of the structural element of 20 kN. E = 2×105 N/mm2. The increase in the
(fixed at one end, free at the other end, and of length of the rod will be (ESE – 2017)
varying cross-section) as shown in the figure, when
1 2
subjected to load 2P at the free end is (a) 10π mm (b) 5π mm
(ESE – 2017)
l 4 1
l l (c) 5π mm (d) 5π mm
3A 113. A steel wire of 20 mm diameter is bent into a circular

A A/2 2P
shape of 10 m radius. If E, the modulus of elasticity,
is 2×106 kg/cm2, then the maximum tensile stress
P, P, induced in the wire is nearly. (ESE – 2018)
(a) 6.66 AE (b) 5.55 AE
(a) 2×103 kg/cm2 (b) 4×103 kg/cm2
P, P, (c) 2×104 kg/cm2 (d) 4×104 kg/cm2
(c) 4.44 AE (d) 3.33 AE
114. A long rod of uniform rectangular section with
109. A chain, working on a crane, has sectional area thickness t, originally straight, is bent into the
of 625 mm2 and transmits a load of 10 kN. When form of a circular arch with displacement 'd' at the
the load is being lowered at a uniform rate of mid-point of span l. The displacement 'd' may be
40 m/min, the chain gets jammed suddenly at regarded as small as compared to the length l. The
which time the length of the chain unwound is longitudinal surface strain is (ESE – 2018)
10 m. Assuming E = 200 GPa, the stress induced in
the chain due to this sudden jamming is 2td 4td 8td 16td
(a) (b) 2 (c) (d)
,2 , ,2 ,2
(ESE – 2017)
(a) 100.6 N/mm2 (b)120.4 N/mm2 115. Principal stresses at a point in an elastic material are
(c) 140.2 N/mm2 (d) 160.0 N//mm2 1.5 σ (tensile), σ (tensile) and 0.5 σ (compressive).
The elastic limit in tension is 210 MPa and
110. A solid uniform metal bar of diameter D mm and
µ = 0.3. The value of σ at failure when computed by
length l mm hangs vertically from its upper end. The
maximum principal strain theory is nearly.
density of the material is ρ N/mm3 and its modulus
(ESE – 2018)
of elasticity is E N/mm2. The total extension of the
(a) 140.5 MPa (b) 145.5 MPa
rod due to its own weight would be (ESE – 2017)
(c) 150.5 MPa (d) 155.5 MPa
ρ,2 ρ, ρ, ρ,2
(a) 2E (b) 2E (c) 4E (d) 4E 116. The deformation of a vertically held bar of length L
and cross-section A is due to its self-weight only. If
111. The principal stresses at a point in a stressed Young’s modulus is E and the unit weight of the bar
material are σ1 = 200 N/mm2, σ2 = 150 N/mm2, and is γ, the elongation dL is (ESE – 2018)
σ3 = 200 N/mm2. E = 210 kN/mm2 and µ = 0.3. The
volumetric strain will be (ESE – 2017) γL3 EL2 γL2 γL2
(a) 2EI (b) 2γ (c) 2E (d) 2AE
(a) 8.954 × 10
–4
(b) 8.954 × 10–2
(c) 6.54 × 10–3 (d) 6.54 × 10–4 117. For a material, the modulus of rigidity is 100 GPa
112. A mild steel bar, circular in cross-section, tapers and the modulus of elasticity is 250 GPa. The value
from 40 mm diameter to 20 mm diameter over its of the Poisson’s ratio is (ESE – 2018)
length of 800 mm. It is subjected to an axial pull (a) 0.20 (b) 0.25 (c) 0.30 (d) 0.35
118. A bar specimen of 36 mm diameter is subjected to 123. A steel bar 2 m long, 20 mm wide and 15 mm thick
a pull of 90 kN during a tension test. The extension is subjected to a tensile load of 30 kN. If Poisson’s
on a gauge length of 200 mm is measured to be ratio is 0.25 and Young’s modulus is 200 GPa, an
0.089 mm and the change in diameter to be 0.0046 increase in volume will be (ESE – 2020)
mm. The Poisson’s ratio will be (ESE-2019) (a) 160 mm
3
(b) 150 mm3
(a) 0.287 (b) 0.265 (c) 140 mm3 (d) 130 mm3
(c) 0.253 (d) 0.241
119. A steel rod 15 m long is at a temperature of KEY & Detailed Solutions
15oC. The values of α = 12× 10–6 /oC and E = 200
01. (d) 02. (a) 03. (a) 04. (b) 05. (a)
GN/m2 are adopted. When the temperature is raised
06. (a) 07. (d) 08. (b) 09. (d) 10. (a)
to 65oC, what is the free expansion of the length;
and if this expansion of the rod is fully prevented, 11. (b) 12. (d) 13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (b)
what is the temperature stress produced? 16.( a) 17. (d) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (b)
(ESE-2019) 21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (c) 24. (a) 25. (c)
(a) 5mm and 120 MN/m 2
26. (d) 27. (c) 28. (b) 29. (a) 30. (a)
(b) 9 mm and 120 MN/m2
31. (b) 32. (a) 33. (b) 34. (c) 35. (b)
(c) 5 mm and 150 MN/m2
36. (a) 37. (d) 38. (a) 39. (d) 40. (c)
(d) 9 mm and 150 MN/m2
41. (c) 42. (d) 43. (b) 44. (a) 45. (c)
120. A bar of uniform rectangular section of area A is 46. (d) 47. (d) 48. (a) 49. (c) 50. (a)
subjected to an axial tensile load P; its Young’s 51. (d) 52. (b) 53. (b) 54. (b) 55. (b)
1
modulus is E and its Poisson's ratio is m . Its 56. (b) 57. (a) 58. (c) 59. (d) 60. (d)
volumetric strain ev is (ESE-2019)
61. (c) 62. (b) 63. (c) 64. (c) 65. (c)
(a) AE b1 + m
3 l (b) AE b1 + m
2l 66. (c) 67.(c) 68. (d) 69. (c) 70. (a)
P P
71. (b) 72. (c) 73. (d) 74. (c) 75. (b)
(c) AE b1 − m
2 l (d) AE b1 − 2m l
P P 1 76. (b) 77. (d) 78. (d) 79. (b) 80. (c)
81. (b) 82. (d) 83. (d) 84. (d) 85. (c)
121. When a round bar material with diameter of 86. (a) 87. (b) 88. (a) 89. (a) 90. (d)
37.5 mm, length of 2.4 m, Young’s modulus of
91. (d) 92. (a) 93. (b) 94. (d) 95. (d)
110 GN/m2 and shear modulus of 42 GN/m2 is
96. (a) 97. (b) 98. (a) 99. (c) 100. (c)
stretched for 2.5 mm, its Bulk modulus will be
nearly (ESE – 2020) 101. (b) 102. (b) 103 (d) 104.(d) 105.(b)
(a) 104 GN/m2 (b) 96 GN/m2 106.(d) 107.(c) 108.(a) 109.(b) 110. (a)
(c) 84 GN/m2 (d) 76 GN/m2 111.(*) 112. (b) 113.(a) 114.(b) 115.(d)
116.(c) 117.(b) 118.(a) 119.(b) 120. (c)
122. A punch of 20 mm diameter is used to punch a hole
121. (b) 122. (c) 123. (b)
in 8 mm thick plate. If the force required to create a
hole is 110 kN, the average shear stress in the plate
01. Ans: (d)
will be nearly (ESE – 2020)
Sol: For an engineering material Poisson’s ratio lies
(a) 410 MPa (b) 320 MPa
between 0 to 0.5.
(c) 220 MPa (d) 140 MPa
Chapter 3 Complex Stresses
01. If the normal cross-section (A) of a member is 05. A body is subjected to two normal strains of
subjected to a tensile force P, the resulting normal magnitude εx = 0.003 and εy = 0.002. The shearing
stress in an oblique plane inclined at an angle θ to strain on a plane inclined at 300 with εx strain given
transverse plane will be (ESE -1992) by (ESE -1993)
(a) P/A sin θ
2
(b) P/A cos2 θ (a) ^ 3 / 2 h # 10 -3
(b) ^ 3 / 4 h # 10 -3
(c) P/2A sin2 θ (d) P/2A cos2θ (c) ]1/2g # 10 -3 (d) (1/3) × 10-3
06. A cast iron block is 5 cm2 cross-section carries an

02. At a point in a steel member, the major principal
axial tensile load of 10 t. The maximum shear stress
stress is 2000 kg/cm2 and the minor principal stress
in the block is given by (ESE -1993)
is compressive. If the uni-axial tensile yield stress
(a) 2000 kg/cm 2
(b) 1000 kg/cm2
is 2500 kg/cm2, then the magnitude of the minor
(c) 500 kg/cm 2
(d) 250 kg/cm2
principal stress at which yielding will commence,
according to the maximum shearing stress theory
07. A Mohr’s circle reduces to a point when the body is
is (ESE -1993)
subjected to (ESE -1993)
(a) 1000 kg/cm
2
(b) 2000 kg/cm2
(a) pure shear
(c) 2500 kg/cm2 (d) 500 kg/cm2
(b) uniaxial stress only
(c) equal and opposite axial stress on two mutually
perpendicular planes, the planes being free of
In a uni-dimensional stress system, the principal
shear
plane is defined as one on which the
(d) equal axial stress on two mutually perpendicular
(ESE -1993)
planes, the planes being free of shear
1. Shear stress is zero
2. Normal stress is zero 08. In the given figure σ1 and σ2 are the maximum and
3. Shear stress is maximum
4. Normal stress is maximum minimum principal stress. In order that the resultant
Of these statements b σ1 + σ2 + σ1 − σ2 l
2
stress on the plane AB is
(a) 1 and 2 are correct (b) 2 and 3 are correct 2 2
,
(c) 1 and 4 are correct (d) 3 and 4 are correct
the value of θ should be (ESE-1994)
σ2
04. If an element is subjected to pure shearing stress τxy,
then the maximum principal stress is equal to Α
(ESE -1993)
(a) 2 τxy (b) τxy/2
σ1
(c) τxy (d) 1 − ^τ xyh
3
θ
(a) 300 (b) 450 (c) 600 (d) 750
140 Solid Mechanics
09. Consider the following statements: If two planes at 12. The cross-section of a bar is subjected to a uniaxial
right angles carry only shear stress of magnitude q, tensile stress p. The tangential stress on a plane
then the inclined at θ to the cross-section of the bar would be
1. diameter of Mohr’s circle would equal 2q. (ESE -1995)
2. Center of the Mohr’s circle would lie at the (a) p sin 2θ/2 (b) p sin 2θ
origin (c) p cos 2θ/2 (d) p cos 2θ
3. principal stresses are unlike and have
magnitude q
4. angle between the principal plane and the
1. On planes having maximum and minimum
plane of maximum shear would be equal to
principal stress, there will be no tangential
450
stress.
Of these statements (ESE -1994)
2. Shear stress on mutually perpendicular planes
(a) 1 and 2 are correct
are numerically equal.
(b) 2 and 4 are correct
3. Maximum shear stress is equal to half the
(c) 3 and 4 are correct
sum of the maximum and minimum principal
(d) 1,2,3 and 4 are correct
stresses.
10. A bar of square section is subjected to a pull of Of these statements (ESE -1995)
10,000 kg. If the maximum allowable shear stress (a) 1,2 and 3 are correct (b) 1 and 2 are correct
on any section is 500 kg/cm2, then the side of the (c) 2 and 3 are correct (d) 1 and 3 are correct
square section will be (ESE -1994)
14. In a stressed body, an elementary cube of material
(a) 5 cm (b) 10 cm is taken at a point with its faces perpendicular to
X and Y reference axes. Tensile stresses equal to
(c) 15 cm (d) 20 cm
15 kN/cm3 and 9 kN/cm2 are observed on these
respective faces. They are also accompanied by
11. Assertion (A): In a Mohr’s circle, the vertical
shear stresses are equal to 4 kN/cm2. The magnitude
coordinates of the ends of any diameter are equal in
of the principal stresses at the point are
magnitude and opposite in direction.
(ESE-1995)
Reason (R): The shear stress on two planes at right
(a) 12 kN/cm2 tensile and 3 kN/cm2 tensile
angles are equal in magnitude and tend to rotate the
(b) 17 kN/cm2 tensile and 7 kN/cm2 tensile
element in opposite directions. (ESE -1994)
(c) 9.5 kN/cm2 compressive and
6.5 kN/cm2 compressive
Codes:
(d) 19 kN/cm2 tensile and 13 kN/cm2 tensile
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct
explanation of A 15. In a rectangular element subjected to like
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not a correct principal tensile stresses p1 and p2 in two mutually
explanation of A perpendicular direction x and y, the maximum shear
(c) A is true but R is false stress would occur along the (ESE -1995)
(d) A is false but R is true (a) plane normal to x-axis
(b) plane normal to y-axis
(c) plane at 450 to y-direction
(d) planes at 450 and 1350 to the y-direction
141 Complex Stresses
16. On an element shown in the given figure, the

50 MPa
stresses are (in MPa)
σx = 110 σy = 30 τxy = τyx = 30
The radius of Mohr’s circle and the principal 100 MPa 100 MPa
stresses σ1,σ2 are (in MPa) (ESE -1996)
σy 50 MPa
τxy=τyx
(a) 25 MPa compression (b) 75 MPa compression
y
(c) 25 MPa tension (d) 75 MPa tension
σx x σx
20. In a plane stress problem, there are normal tensile

stresses σx and σy accompanied by shear stress τxy
τyx=τxy
at a point along orthogonal Cartesian co-ordinates
σ y
x and y respectively. If it is observed that the
Radius = r σ1 σ2
minimum principal stress on a certain plane is zero
(a) 50 120 20
then (ESE -1998)
(b) 55 110 30 = + =
(a) τ xy σx σy (b) τ xy σx − σy
(c) 60 20 140 σ
(d) 70 20 140 (d) τ xy = σ yx
(c) τ xy = σ x .σ y

17. Assertion (A): The inclination of the line joining
any point ‘p’ on the Mohr’s circle and the origin 21. A plane rectangular element is subjected to
‘o’ with x-axis equals twice the angle between the two normal stresses P1 and P2 on two mutually
resultant stress and the normal of the plane for perpendicular planes (P1 and P2) as shown in the
which P stands. figure. Which one of the following statements is
Reason (R): The inclination of the line joining NOT true in regard? (ESE -1998)
any point ‘p’ on the Mohr’s circle and the center
P2
of the circle ‘c’ with x-axis equals twice the angle
between the plane for which P stands and zero D C
degree plane. (ESE -1996)

P1 P1
18. At a point in a strained material, if two mutually
perpendicular tensile stresses of 2000 kg/cm2
A B
and 1000 kg/cm2 are acting, then the intensity of
tangential stress on a plane inclined at 150 to the P2
axis of the minor stress will be (ESE -1997)
(a) 125 kg/cm
2
(b) 250 kg/cm2 (a) The planes BC and CD are principal planes
(c) 500 kg/cm2 (d) 1000 kg/cm2 (b) Shear stresses will act on planes inclined to
planes AB and CB
19. For the state of stress shown in the below figure, (c) There will not be any normal stress on planes
normal stresses acting on the plane of maximum having maximum shear stress
shear stress is (ESE -1997) (d) There will not be a shear stress on planes AB
and BC
142 Solid Mechanics
22. Assertion (A): Bending moment may be defined as 25. The radius of Mohr’s circle of stress of a strained
the algebraic sum of the moments of all forces on element is 20 N/mm2 and minor principal tensile
either side of the section. stress is 10 N/mm2. The major principal stress is
Reason (R): The rate of change of bending moment (ESE -1999)
is equal to shear force at the section (ESE -1998) (a) 30 N/mm2 (b) 50 N/mm2
(c) 60 N/mm2 (d) 100 N/mm2
23. The rectangular block shown in the given figure
is subjected to pure shear of intensity q. if BE 26. Assertion (A): In a two-dimensional stress system,
represents the principal plane and the principal the direct stresses on two planes at 450 and 1350 to
stresses are σ1, σ2 then the values of θ,σ1 and σ2 the principal planes have the same magnitude and
will be respectively (ESE -1999) nature of stress.
q Reason (R): Points representing these stresses
D E A are on the ends of vertical diameter of the Mohr’s
circle. (ESE -2000)

q θ q 27. Assertion (A): In the analysis of two-dimensional
stresses, the normal stress on a plane will be greater
C B than the average principal stress, if the inclination
q of that plane with the plane of maximum principal
stress is less than 450.
(a) 00, 900; + q and −q
Reason (R): The horizontal coordinate of the point
(b) 300, 1200; +q and −q on the Mohr’s circle represents the stresses on the
(c) 450, 1350; +q/2 and −q/2 given plane which is greater than coordinate of the
(d) 450, 1350; +q and −q center of Mohr’s circle. (ESE-2000)
24. The state of stresses on an element is shown in 28. If a prismatic member having area of cross-section
the given figure, the values of stresses are σx (=32 ‘A’ is subjected to a tensile load ‘P, then the
MPa); σy (= −10 MPa) and major principal stress σ1 maximum shear stress and its inclination with the
(= 40 MPa). The minor principal stress σ2 is direction of load will be (ESE-2000)
(a) b A l and 45c (b) b A l and 45c
σy (ESE -1999) P 2 P
τyx

(c) b 2A l and 45c (d) b A l and 60c
y P P
τyx
σx σx
x
τyx 29. The principal stress at a point in a strained material
are p1 and p2. The resultant stress pr on the plane
τyx
carrying the maximum shear stress would be
τyx
(ESE-2000)
σy
^ 2 + 2h1/2 ^P 2 + P22h 1/2

(a) −22 MPa (a) ; P1 P2 E (b) ; 1 E
2 2
(b) −18 MPa
(c) 22 MPa (c) 62 ^P12 + P22h@ (d) 2 6P12 + P22@
1/2 1/2

(d) indeterminable due to insufficient data
30. Consider the following statements: (a) the shear stress is a maximum
Mohr’s Circle is used to determine the stress on an (b) the normal stress is zero
oblique section of a body subjected to (c) the shear stress is zero
1. Direct tensile stress on one plane accompanied by (d) the normal stress is maximum
a shear stress.
2. Direct tensile stresses in two mutually 33. The radius of Mohr’s circle is zero when the state of
perpendicular directions accompanied by a stress is such that (ESE-2003)
simple shear stress. (a) shear stress is zero
3. Direct tensile stress in two mutually perpendicular (b) there is pure shear
directions. (c) there is no shear stress but identical direct
4. A simple shear stress stresses in two mutually perpendicular
Select the correct answer using the codes given directions
below: (ESE-2002) (d) there is no shear stress but equal direct
(a) 1 and 4 (b) 2 and 3 stresses, opposite in nature, in two mutually
(c) 1,2,3 and 4 (d) 1,2 and 3 perpendicular directions.
34. The given figure shows the stress condition of an

31. A bar of square cross-section, having area of cross- element. The principal stresses are (ESE-2003)
section ‘A’ is subjected to a compressive force ‘P as τ
shown in the figure
Oblique plane
τ τ
θ
P P
τ
The intensity of the tangential stress on the oblique
(c) ± τ (d) !b 3 l τ
!τ 2
plane is given by (ESE-2002) (a) ± 2τ (b) 2

(a) P sin 2θ (b) P cos2θ
(c) b 2A l sin 2θ (d) b 2A l cos 2θ 35. If the principal stresses at a point in a stressed body
P P
are150 kN/m2 tensile and 50 kN/m2 compressive,
then maximum shear stress at this point will be
32. p1 and p2 are two equal tensile principal stresses. On
(ESE-2003)
the plane AB inclined at 450 to the plane of p1
(a) 100 kN/m2 (b) 150 kN/m2
P
(ESE -2002)
2 (c) 200 kN/m2 (d) 250 kN/m2
A
36. In the Mohr’s circle for strains, radius of Mohr’s
circle gives the (ESE-2003)
P1
P1 (a) Minimum value of normal strain
450
(b) Maximum value of normal strain
(c) Maximum value of shear strain
B
(d) Half of maximum value of shear strain
P2
144 Solid Mechanics
37. The principal strains at a point are +800×10–6 40. A thin wooden plate PQRS is made by gluing two
cm/cm +400×10–6 cm/cm and –1200×10–6 cm/cm. pieces of wood along PR as shown in the diagram
The volumetric strain is equal to (ESE-2003) below. σy (ESE-2004)
(a) +1200×10 cm/cm
–6
(b) +800×10–6 cm/cm
P Q
(c) –1200×10–6 cm/cm (d) zero
y
38. For the plane stress situation shown in the diagram
σX x σX
below, what is the maximum shear stress ?
(ESE-2004) 450
σy=20 Mpa
S R
σy
y
σx=20 Mpa x σx=20 Mpa If σx = –30MPa, σy = 10MPa and τxy = 0, then what
is the normal stress on the surface PR ?
(a) –10MPa (b) –20 MPa
(c) 10MPa (d) 20MPa
σy=20 Mpa
41. In a plane strain condition in the XY plane, the
(a) Zero, when X and Y axis are rotated 450
strain components associated with XY axes are
clockwise.
εx = 800 ×10–6, εy =100×10–6, fxy = –800 ×10–6. What
(b) Zero, at all positions of orientation of X and Y
are the principal strains for these strain values?
axis.
(ESE-2004)
(c) 20 MPa, at all positions of orientation of X and
(a) 981 × 10 , –81× 10
–6 –6
Y axis.
(b) 891 × 10–6, –18× 10–6
(d) –20 MPa, when X and Y axis are rotated 450
(c) 881 × 10–6, –71× 10–6
anticlockwise.
(d) 839 × 10–6, –81× 10–6
39. In a piece of stressed material, the principal
42. In a plane strain case in the XY plane, normal strain
stress are σ1=3.0kN/m2 tensile and σ2=7.0 kN/m2
in X and Y direction are equal to zero and shear is
compressive as shown in the diagram below.
equal to 3×10–6. What is the value of diameter of
(ESE-2004)
Mohr’s circle of strain for these strain values ?
σ 2
B (ESE-2004)

(a) 6 ×10
–6
(b) 3×10 –6
σ1 θ=300 σ1
(c) 1.5 ×10 –6
(d) Zero
A σn
σ2 43. For a case of plane stress, σx = 40 MN/m2, σy = 0,
τ = 80MN/m2. What are the principal stresses (in
The line of action of the tensile stress makes an MN/m2) and their orientation with x and y axes?
angle θ= 300 to the normal to the plane AB. What is (ESE-2004)
the normal stress σn ? (a) σ1 = 80, σ2 = 40, θ1 = 300
(a) +0.5 kN/m2 (b) -1.5 kN/m2 (b) σ1 = 100, σ2 = –60, θ1 = 320
(c) +2.0 kN/m2 (d) -2.5 kN/m2 (c) σ1 = 102.5, σ2 = –62.5, θ1 = 360
(d) σ1 = 105, σ2 = 62, θ1 = 360
44. A thin rod of 10mm diameter is subjected to a tensile

τ
force of 7850N. What are the principal stresses and
maximum shear stress? (ESE-2004)
(a) 70MPa, 50MPa, 10MPa
(b) 100MPa, Zero, 50MPa σ σ2 σ1
(c) 100MPa, 50MPa, 25MPa
(d) 100MPa, zero, zero
1000 MPa 1000 MPa
45. σx, σy and τxy are normal and shear stresses on the
x and y faces. What is the radius of Mohr’s circle in
terms of these stresses? (ESE-2004) (a) 2000 MPa (b)
σx − σy σx − σy
1000 MPa
+ τ xy
1000 MPa
(a) 2 (b) 2
2000 MPa
2000 MPa
c σ x σ y m + τ2xy (d) c σ x σ y m − τ2xy
− 2
− 2
(c)
2 2 500 MPa
2000 MPa
46. In a plane strain problem in XY plane, the shear (c) (d) 1000 MPa
strain = 12 × 10–6, and the normal strain in X and
1000 MPa
500 MPa
Y direction = 0. For this state of strain, what is the
diameter of the Mohr’s circle of strain?
(ESE-2005)
(a) 6 × 10
–6
(b) 8 × 10 –6 1000 MPa
(c) 12 × 10–6 (d) 24 × 10–6 50. If the maximum principal stress for an element
47. At a certain point in a strained material, under bi-axial stress situation is 100MPa (tensile)
there are two mutually perpendicular stresses and the maximum shear stress is also 100MPa, then
σx = 100 N/mm2 (tensile) and σy = 50 N/mm2 what is the other principal stress? (ESE-2006)
(compressive). (a) 200MPa (tensile)
[Notation: tensile (+); compressive (–)] (b) 200MPa (compressive)
What are the values of the principal stresses in (c) 100MPa (compressive)
N/mm2 at that point? (ESE-2005) (d) zero
(a) 100, –50 (b) –100, 50 51. An element is subjected to stress as given below.
(c) 75, –25 (d) –75, 25 10 MPa
(ESE-2007)
48. For a state of plane stress σ1=σx= 40 MPa and σ2 =

σy = 20 MPa. What are the values of the maximum
20 MPa 20 MPa
in plane shearing stress and absolute maximum
shearing stress? (ESE-2005)
(a) (± 10, 20) MPa (b) (± 10, 10) MPa
(c) (± 20, 10) MPa (d) (± 20, 20) MPa 10 MPa
For this state of stress, what is the maximum shear

49. The Mohr’s circle given above corresponds to stress?
which one of the following stress conditions (a) 2.5 MPa (b) 5 MPa
(ESE-2006) (c) 10 MPa (d) 15 MPa
146 Solid Mechanics
52. If modulus of elasticity of material is 57. In a body loaded under plane stress conditions, what
189.8 GN/m2 and its Poisson’s ratio is 0.30, what is the number of independent stress components in
is the approximate value of shear modulus of the order to completely specify the state of stress at a
material? (ESE-2007) point? (ESE-2008)
(a) 73 GN/m
2
(b) 93.3 GN/m2 (a) 3 (b) 4 (c) 6 (d) 9
(c) 103.9 GN/m2 (d) 123.3 GN/m2
58. What is the diameter of Mohr’s circle of stress for
the state of stress shown below? (ESE-2008)
53. Mohr’s stress circle helps in determining which of

the following ? 10 MPa
1. Normal stresses on one plane.
2. Normal and tangential stresses on two planes.
3. Principal stresses in all three directions.
10 MPa
4. Inclination of principal planes.
below: (ESE-2007)
(a) 1 and 2 only (b) 2 and 3 only
(c) 3 and 4 only (d) 2 and 4 only (a) 20 (b) 10 2 (c) 10 (d) Zero
54. Consider the following statements: 59. In a plane strain situation in xy plane, the
Mohr’s strain circle can be drawn displacements at a point are given as:
1. for plane stress conditions u = (–2x + 8y) × 10–6 unit v = (–3x + 5y) × 10–6
2. if strains in three directions are known unit
3. if strains on two mutually perpendicular planes what is the shearing strain ? (ESE-2008)
are known (ESE-2007) (a) 9 × 10
–6
(b) 7 × 10–6
Which of these statements are correct? (c) 5 × 10
–6
(d) 3 × 10–6
(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 2 and 3 only
(c) 1 and 2 only (d) 1 and 3 only 60. If a body carries two unlike principal stresses, what
is the maximum shear stress? (ESE-2008)
55. What is the angle between principal strain axis and (a) Half the difference of magnitude of the
maximum shear strain axis? (ESE-2007) principal stresses
(a) 0
0
(b) 30
0
(c) 45
0
(d) 900 (b) Half the sum of the magnitude of principal
stresses
56. In a strained material, the principal stresses in the
(c) Difference of the magnitude of principal
x and y directions are 100 N/mm2 (tensile) and 60
stresses
N/mm2 (compressive). On an inclined plane, the
(d) Sum of the magnitude of principal stresses
normal to which makes an angle 300 to the x-axis,
what is the tangential stress in N/mm2 ?
61. In a biaxial strain system εx and εy , what is the
(ESE-2007)
maximum engineering shearing strain?
(a) 30 3 (b) 40 3 (c) 60 (d) 40
(ESE-2008)
(a) ε x + ε y (b) ε x − ε y
εx + εy εx − εy
(b) 2 (d) 2
62. At a point in a piece of stressed material the stresses 66. A square element is subjected to principal stresses
are: (ESE-2009) in N/mm2 as shown in figure below. The intensity of
σx = α kN/m tensile (normal)
2
normal stress σn on plane BD is (ESE-2010)
τxy = τyx = β kN/m2 (shearing)
Although the values of α and β are not known yet 200
the principal stresses are equal to each other being σn
D A
(5kN/m2). What is the radius of Mohr’s circle ?
_ + i
(a) 2.5 + (α+β) (b) 2.5 + α β 200 θ 200
2
(c) Zero (d) 2.5
C B
63. What is the radius of Mohr’s circle in case of bi-axial
200
state of stress? (ESE-2009)
(a) Half the sum of the two principal stresses
(b) Half the difference of the two principal stresses (a) 200 2 (b) 100
(c) Difference of the two principal stresses (c) 200 (d) 0
(d) Sum of the two principal stresses
67. Consider the following statements: (ESE-2010)
64. Figure below shows a state of plane stress. If there is a state of pure shear τ at a point then
(ESE-2009) 1. The Mohr’s circle is tangential to the y-axis
21 MN/m2 2. The centre of the Mohr’s circle coincides with
the origin.
3. Unlike principal stresses are each numerically
y
equals to τ
σx σx
x 4. Principal stresses are like
Which of these statements is/are correct?
56 MN/m2 (a) 1 only (b) 1 and 2
σv=21 MN/m2 (c) 2 and 3 (d) 3 and 4
If the minimum principal stress is –7MN/m2 then 68. A point in two-dimensional stress state subjected to
what is the value of σx ? biaxial stress is shown in figure below. What is the
(a) 30 MN/m2 (b) 68 MN/m2 normal stress acting on the plane AB?
(c) 98 MN/m2 (d) 105 MN/m2 (ESE-2010) σ
Α
65. A two-dimensional stress system has like stresses σx
= 100 N/mm2 and σy = 200 N/mm2 in two mutually σ σ
perpendicular directions. The x, y, co-ordinates of θ
the centre of the Mohr’s circle are (ESE-2010)

(a) (0,150) (b) (150,0) Β
σ
(c) (-50,0) (d) (50,0)
(a) zero (b) σ
(c) σcos2θ (d) σ sinθ cosθ
148 Solid Mechanics
69. In a strained material, the principal stresses in the X 73.

100 N/mm2
and Y directions respectively are 100N/mm2 (Ten-
sile) and 60 N/m2 (Compressive). On an inclined
D E A σn
plane, the normal to which makes an angle of 30o
to the X-axis, the major principal stress, in N/mm2,
would be (ESE-2011)
(a) 60 (b) 80 (c) 20 (d) 40 400 N/mm2 400 N/mm2
300
70. Which one of the following statements is correct?

B
(ESE-2011) C
(a) Principal stress is defined as the shear stresses
100 N/mm2
on planes on which the normal stress is
maximum or minimum. The principal stresses in N/mm2 on a rectangular
(b) The centre of Mohr’s circle for a two- element are shown in the above figure. The intensity
dimensional stress system always lies in the of normal stress σn on the oblique plane BE is
y-axis (adopting conventional axes notation). (ESE-2013)
(c) The plane of maximum shear stress is inclined (a) 125 N/mm
2
(b) 425 N/mm2
to the plane of principal stress at an angle of (c) 275 N/mm2 (d) 250 N/mm2
45o.
(d) In case of biaxial state of normal stresses, the 74.
Y
normal stress on 45o plane is equal to the sum θ=450 1
of normal stresses.
20 kN 20 kN
71. In a two-dimensional stress system, the radius of the
Mohr’s circle represents (ESE-2012) 1
(a) maximum normal stress Y
(b) minimum normal stress A mild steel bar of square cross-section has a
(c) minimum shear stress sectional area of 200 mm2. It is subjected to an
(d) maximum shear stress axial force of 20kN as shown in the above figure.
The intensity of the normal tensile stress is
72. In a plane stress problem, there are normal tensile N/mm2 on the oblique plane 1-1 at 45o with the YY-
stresses σx > σy, with σx >σy, accompanied by shear axis which is normal to the longitudinal axis will
stress τxy at a point in the x-y plane. If it is observed be (ESE-2013)
that the minimum principal stress on a certain (a) 25 (b) 50 (c) 75 (d) 100
section is zero, then (ESE-2012)
σ
(a) τ xy = σ x .σ y (b) τ xy = σ yx 75. A solid circular shaft has been subjected to a pure
torsion moment. The ratio of maximum shear stress
(c) τ xy = σ x − σ y (d) τ xy = σ x + σ y to maximum normal stress at any point would be
(ESE-2013)
(a) 1:2 (b) 1:1 (c) 2:3 (d) 2:1
76. A rectangular bar of cross-sectional area A is 80. Two dimensional stress system in a block made of a
subjected to an axial tensile load P. The maximum material with Poisson’s ratio of 0.3 is shown in the
shear stress will occur on a plane at Xo to any normal figure (ESE – 2014)
cross-section where Xo is (ESE-2013)
(a) 90
o
(b) 270
o
(c) 180
o
(d) 45o σ
A B
77. Statement (I): Mohr’s theory is based on logical
arrangement of experimental results. 60 Ν/mm2
Statement (II): Mohr’s theory generalizes

coulomb’s theory. (ESE – 2014) The limiting magnitude of the stress σ so as to result
Codes: there is no change in length AB of the block is
(a) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are (a) 60 N/mm2 (b) 120 N/mm2
individually true and Statement (II) is the (c) 200 N/mm2 (d) 240 N/mm2
correct explanation of Statement (I)
(b) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are 81. The principal stresses at a point in a bar are
individually true but statement (II) is not the 160 N/mm2 (tensile) and 80 N/mm2 (compressive).
correct explanation of statement (I) The accompanying maximum shear stress intensity
(c) Statement (I) is true but Statement (II) is false is (ESE – 2014)
(d) Statement (I) is false but Statement (II) is true (a) 100 N/mm2 (b) 110 N/mm2
(c) 120 N/mm
2
(d) 140 N/mm2
If the planes at right angles carry only shear stress 82. An element of a certain material in plane strain has
of magnitude q in a certain instance, then the εx = 800 ×10–6
1. diameter of Mohr’s circle would be equal to 2q εy = 400 ×10–6
2. centre of Mohr’s circle would lie at the origin γxy = 300 ×10–6
3. principal stresses are unlike and of magnitude
What is the maximum shearing strain?(ESE – 2014)
q each (a) 150×10–6 (b) 355 ×10–6
4. angle between the principal plane and the (c) 250 ×10–6 (d) 500 ×10–6
plane of maximum shear would be 45o
Which of the above statements are correct? 83. At a point in the web of a girder, the bending and
(ESE – 2014) the shearing stresses are 90 N/mm2 (tensile) and
(a) 1,2 and 3 only (b) 1,2 and 4 only 45 N/mm2 respectively. The principal stresses are
(c) 3 and 4 only (d) 1,2,3 and 4 (ESE – 2014)
(a) 108.64 N/mm2 (tensile) and 18.64 N/mm2
79. The state of two-dimensional stresses acting on a (compressive)
concrete lamina consists of a direct tensile stress (b) 107.60 N/mm2 (compressive) and 18.64
σx = 1.5 N/mm2 and shear stress τ = 1.20 N/mm2, N/mm2 (tensile)
when cracking of concrete is just impending. The (c) 108.64 N/mm2 (Compressive) and 18.64
permissible tensile strength of the concrete is N/mm2(tensile)
(ESE – 2014) (d) 0.64 N/mm 2 (tensile) and 0.78 N/mm 2
(a) 1.50 N/mm
2
(b) 2.17 N/mm2 (compressive)
(c) 2.08 N/mm2 (d) 2.29 N/mm2
150 Solid Mechanics
84. Which one of the following Mohr’s Circles 88. The state of stress on an element in plane stress is
represents the state of pure shear? (ESE – 2015) shown as in the figure. (ESE – 2015)
σ
τ
(b)
(a) τ
q
o σ o σ
150 N/mm2
τ τ
(c) (d)
o
σ
What is the value of σ if the values of the principal
stresses are 164 N /mm2 and 36 N/mm2 , both
o σ
tensile?
(a) 100 N/mm2 (b) 75 N/mm2
85. A specimen is subjected to a pure shear stress regime (c) 62.5 N/mm
2
(d) 50 N/mm2
of intensity τ. The resulting tensile and compressive
stresses σ, which occur on planes inclined at 45o to 89. The state of stress at a point in 2-D stress system
the direction of the shear stresses, would be is characterized by direct stresses of 40 MPa
(ESE – 2015) compressive and 80 MPa tensile, on mutually
τ τ perpendicular planes. Shear stress is absent on these
(a) τ (b) 2 (c) 2 τ (d)
2
planes. The maximum shear stress at this point
(along a duly identified plane) is (ESE – 2015)
86. A mild steel bar is subjected to an axial force P, (a) 20 MPa (b) 40 MPa
resulting in an axial stress σx= 100 N/mm2. What (c) 60 MPa (d) 80 MPa
would be the normal stress σn on a plane n-n making
an angle θ = 45o with its axis? (ESE – 2015) 90. An electrical resistance strain rosette indicates of
–400, +800 and +500 along the x, y and 45o axes.
y
n σn What is the shearing strain is γxy? (ESE – 2015)
(a) 1000 (b) 800 (c) 600 (d) –200
θ
P P
91. The biaxial stress system in an element is shown
n in the figure. Which of the following will give the
y
normal stress in N/mm2 in the plane BD making an
(a) 25 N/mm2 (b) 40 N/mm2 angle of 45o with the plane BA? (ESE – 2015)
(c) 50 N/mm2 (d) 100 N/mm2
87. Which of the following stresses is measured on

vertical axis in Mohr’s Circle Method?
(ESE – 2015)
(a) Principal stress (b) Normal stress
(c) Tangential stress (d) Maximum stress
σ2=40 Ν/mm2
100 N/mm2
σn
D D A
A
σ1=60 Ν/mm2 300 N/mm2 300 N/mm2

σ1=60 Ν/mm2
450
C B
C B
100 N/mm2
σ2=40 Ν/mm2

(a) 25 (b) 20 (c) 15 (d) 10 (a) 25 5 N/mm2 (b) 50 5 N/mm2
92. Which of the following statements are correct for (c) 75 5 N/mm2 (d) 100 5 N/mm2
stresses acting on mutually perpendicular faces of a
plane element? 95. The state of stress at a certain point in a stressed
1. The sum of the normal stresses in mutually body is as shown in the figure. Normal stress in
perpendicular planes is equal to the sum of the x-direction is 80 MPa (Tensile) and in y-direction
principal stresses. is 40 MPa (Compressive). The radius of the Mohr’s
2. The shearing stresses in two mutually circle for this state of stress will be (ESE – 2017)
perpendicular planes are equal in magnitude σy=40 MPa
and direction.
3. Maximum shear stress is half of the difference
between principal stresses. (ESE – 2016) σx=80 MPa σx=80 MPa
(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 2 only
(c) 2 and 3 only (d) 1 and 3 only
93. The state of stress on an element is as shown in the σy=40 MPa
figure. If E = 2 × 105 N/mm2 and Poisson’s ratio

= 0.3, the magnitude of the stress σ for no strain in (a) 60 MPa (b) 40MPa
BC is (ESE σ – 2016) (c) 20 MPa (d) 10 MPa
A B
96. For the state of stress shown in the figure, the
80 N/mm2 80 N/mm2
maximum and minimum principal stresses (taking
D C tensile stress as +, and compressive stress as –) will
σ be (ESE – 2017)
(a) 84 N/mm2 (b) 64 N/mm2 30 MPa
(c) 34 N/mm2 (d) 24 N/mm2 25 MPa
94. A square element of a structural part is subjected to 90 MPa 90 MPa

biaxial stresses as shown in the figure. On a plane
along BD, the intensity of the resultant stress due to 25 MPa
these conditions will be (ESE – 2016)

30 MPa
152 Solid Mechanics
(a) 95 MPa and (–35) MPa (a) 142 MPa (b)155 MPa
(b) 60 MPa and 30MPa (c) 167 MPa (d)179 MPa
(c) 95 MPa and (–30) MPa
(d) 60 MPa and 35 MPa 102. The principal stresses in the wall of a container are
40 MN/mm2 and 80 MN/mm2. The normal makes an
97. If strains on a piece of metal are εx = –120 µ m/m, angle of 30o with a direction of maximum principal
εy = –30 µm/m, and γ = 120 µ m/m, what is the stress. The resultant stresses (in magnitude) in the
maximum principal strain ? (ESE – 2018) plane will be nearly (ESE-2019)
(a) 0 (b) 50 µ m/m
40MN/mm2
(c) 75 µ m/m (d) 150 µ m/m
98. The state of stress at a point is given by : σx = 80 300
MPa, σy = 100 MPa and τxy = 60 MPa. If the yield 80MN/mm2

300
80MN/mm2
strength for the material is 150 MPa, as determined

in a uniaxial test, then the maximum shear stress is,
nearly (ESE – 2018)
(a) 150.8 MPa (b) 127.4 MPa 40MN/mm2
(c) 119.3 MPa (d) 104.0 MPa (a) 84 MN/mm2 (b) 72 MN/mm2
(c) 64 MN/mm2 (d) 58 MN/mm2
99. The normal stresses on two mutually perpendicular
planes are 140 N/mm2 (Tensile) and 70 N/mm2 103. At a point in a two dimensional stress system, the
(Tensile). If the maximum shear stress is 45 N/mm2, normal stress on two mutually perpendicular planes
the shear stress on these planes will be nearly are σxx and σyy and shear stress is τxy. One of the
(ESE-2019) principal stresses will become zero when the value
(a) 20.9 N/mm 2
(b) 24.6 N/mm2 of shear stress τxy is (ESE – 2020)
(c) 28.3 N/mm2 (d) 32.0 N/mm2 (a) ± (σxx σyy) (b) ! σ xx - σ yy
(c) ! σ xx + σ yy (d) ! σ xx σ yy
100. The normal stresses on the two mutually
perpendicular planes at a point are 120 MPa
(Tensile) and 60 MPa (Tensile). If the shear stress
across these planes is 30 MPa, the principal stresses
will be nearly (ESE-2019)
(a) 124 MPa (Tensile) and 24 MPa (Compressive)
(b) 132 MPa (Tensile) and 24 MPa (Compressive)
(c) 124 MPa (Tensile) and 48 MPa (Tensile)
(d) 132 MPa (Tensile) and 48 MPa (Tensile)

101. At a point in a material, the stresses acting on
two planes at right angles to each other are σz =
120 MPa and σy= –200 MPa and τzy = – 80 MPa.
The maximum shear stress on the element will be
nearly (ESE-2019)
P
KEY & Detailed Solutions σi = A cos2 θ
01.(b) 02.(d) 03.(c) 04.(c) 05.(a)

ba 1 + cos 2θ = cos2 θ l
2
06.(b) 07.(d) 08. (b) 09.(d) 10.(b)
11.(a) 12.(a) 13.(b) 14.(b) 15.(d)
16.(a) 17.(d) 18.(b) 19.(c) 20.(c) 02. Ans: (d)
Sol: Major principal stress, σ1 = 2000 kg/cm2
21.(c) 22.(b) 23.(d) 24.(b) 25.(b)
σ2: is compressive
26.(b) 27.(a) 28.(c) 29.(b) 30.(c)
According to maximum
31.(c) 32.(c) 33.(c) 34.(c) 35.(a)
Shear stress theory
36.(d) 37.(d) 38.(b) 39.(a) 40.(a) σ1 − σ2 = fy
2 τ max = 2
41.(a) 42.(b) 43.(c) 44.(b) 45.(c)
46.(c) 47.(a) 48.(a) 49.(c) 50.(c) 2000 − ^− σ2h 2500
=
2 2
51.(b) 52.(a) 53.(c) 54.(a) 55.(c)
σ2 = 500 kg/cm2
56.(b) 57.(a) 58.(d) 59.(c) 60.(b)

61.(b) 62.(c) 63.(b) 64.(d) 65.(b) 03. Ans:(c)
66. (d) 67. (c) 68. (b) 69. (a) 70. (c) Sol:
71. (d) 72. (a) 73. (c) 74. (b) 75. (b) • On principal plane shear stress is zero.
• On principal plane normal stress is either
76. (d) 77. (a) 78. (a) 79. (b) 80. (c)
maximum (or) minimum.
81. (c) 82. (d) 83. (a) 84. (b) 85. (a)
04. Ans: (c)
86. (c) 87. (c) 88. (d) 89. (c) 90. (c)
Sol: An element is subjected to pure shear τ,
91. (d) 92. (d) 93. (d) 94. (d) 95. (a)
principal stress σ1 = – σ2 = τ
96. (a) 97. (d) 98. (*) 99. (c) 100.(d) σ1
τ
101.(d) 102.(b) 103. (d)
τ τ
01. Ans: (b)
Sol: σθ τ
θ P σ1=+τ σ2=(−τ)
σ=
A
σx + σy σx − σy 05. Ans: (a)
Using σi = 3
+ +
2 cos 2θ τ xy sin 2θ
Sol: φ30 ε x − ε y φ xy
P
Substituting σ x = σ = A 2 = 2 sin 2θ − 2 cos 2θ
sy = 0
] # 30g = 1 10 c 3 m
φ30 0.003 − 0.002 # -3
txy = 0 = sin 2
2 2 2 2
σ σ 3
σi = 2 + 2 cos 2θ φ30 = 2 # 10 -3
= P 61 + cos 2θ@
2A
Chapter 4 Shear Force & Bending
Moment Diagrams
01. In case of a cantilever carrying uniformly varying (a) M2 = 0 (b) M1 = M2
1
load, the ratio of maximum bending moment at fix (c) M2 = 2 M1 (d) b = 4
end when the load increases from zero at fixed end
to W at free end and that when the load increases 04. Consider the following statements with reference
from zero at free end to W at fixed end is to a continuous beam supported at A, C and E for
(ESE -1992) which the shear force diagram is shown in the given
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 1/2 (d) 1/4 figure. There is
1. A concentrated load acting at point B.
02. The Shear Force Diagram (SFD) and Bending 2. A concentrated load acting at point D.
Moment Diagram (BMD) are shown in figure:. 3. A uniformly distributed load acting on the
(ESE -1992) portion CE.
S.F.D
+ +
B C D E
Negative 1t−m A
−
−
B.M.D
The corresponding loading diagram would be (a) 1, 2 and 3 are correct (ESE -1993)
(b) 1 and 2 are correct
1 tm (b) 1 tm
(a) A B A B (c) 2 and 3 are correct
(d) 1 and 3 are correct
05. Match List –I with List-II and select the correct

(c)
1 tm 1 tm (d) 1 tm answer using the codes given below the lists
A B B
(ESE -1993)
List –I List - II
(Type of beam (S.F diagram)
03. A long construction member of uniform section with type of loading)
is to be lifted using ropes at C and D as shown in
figure. This causes bending moments due to self- A. 1.
weight as shown. To minimize the peak value of
bending moment, the overhang ‘b’ shall be such
that (ESE -1993) B. 2.
b b
A C E D B
C. 3.
l
M2
D. 4.
M1 M1
167 Shear Force & Bending Moment
Codes: 09. In a cantilever beam the bending moment at end

A B C D A B C D section of the beam is equal to the (ESE-1994)
(a) 4 1 2 3 (b) 4 3 2 1 (a) area of the shear force diagram between the
(c) 3 4 1 2 (d) 3 4 2 1 free end of the beam and that section
(b) area of the bending moment diagram between
06. End A of the beam AB shown in the figure is the free end of the beam and that section
rollers and end B is hinged. C and D are the points (c) the area of shear force diagram between the
on normal drawn at A and B to the beam at A and B fixed end of the beam and that section
respectively. To determine the reactions, funicular (d) the vertical ordinate at the section in the shear
polygon must start at (ESE -1993) force diagram
C P1 D
P2 10. Assertion (A): For simply supported beam of RC
A B rectangular section under any load, the shear stress
on the bottom fibre of a section at which SF=(0) is
zero.
(a) A (b) B (c) C (d) D
Reason (R): For a simply supported beam of
a homogenous material, the shear stress on the
07. The bending moment diagram for an overhanging
bottom fibre at all sections under any load is zero.
beam is shown in the given figure.
(ESE-1994)
The points of contra flexure would include
Codes:
(ESE -1993)

explanation of A
A B E F
D
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not a correct
C G
explanation of A
(a) A and F (b) B and E
(d) A is false but R is true
(c) C and D (d) A and D
08. The given sketch shows a beam of supported length 11. Assertion (A): Bending moment in a beam is
‘l’ and overhang 0.1l a carrying a concentrated maximum at section where shear force is zero.
load W at the end of the overhang. Which one of Reason (R): Shear force at a section is given by the
the following figures would represent correct shear rate of change of bending moment (ESE-1995)

force diagram for the beam? (ESE -1993)
W 12. Match List-I with List –II and select the correct
0.1l l
List -I
0.1l l (b)
(a) 0.1 W (Type and Position of load on cantilever)
W W A. Carrying linearly varying load from zero at its
0.1l l free end and maximum at the fixed end
B. Subjected to uniformly distributed load
(d)
(c) C. Carrying concentrated load at its free end
W W D. Whose free end is subjected to bending
0.1l l
moment
0.1l l
168 Solid Mechanics
List -II (ESE-1995) 15. A simply-supported beam is loaded as shown in the

(Shape of moment diagram for cantilever) given figure. The bending moment at E would be
1. Parabola 2. Rectangle (ESE-1995)
3. Cubic parabola 4. Triangle 2t 4t 2t
2 tm 2 tm
Codes: C E D
A B
A B C D A B C D
(a) 3 2 1 4 (b) 4 3 2 1
1m 1m 1m 1m
(c) 3 1 4 2 (d) 2 4 1 3
(a) 6 t - m (Sagging) (b) 4 t - m (Hogging)
13. The bending moment diagram of the beam shown (c) 6 t - m (Hogging) (d) 4 t - m (Sagging)
in figure is (ESE-1995)
16. Which one of the following statements is correct?
2 kN
M
N (ESE-1995)
L 0 (a) Shear force is the first derivative of bending
moment.
2m 1m 2m
(a)
(b) Shear force is the first derivative of intensity of
2 kNm (b) load
(c) Load intensity on a beam is the first derivative
1.6 kNm 2.4 kNm of bending moment
0 L M N O (d) Bending moment is the first derivative of shear
L M N O
force
(d)
(c) 2 kNm 17. Assertion (A): The maximum bending moment
2.4 kNm occurs where the shear force is either zero or
2.4 kNm
L M N O L M N O ‘changes sign.
Reason (R): If the shear force diagram line between
the two points is horizontal, the BM diagram line is
inclined, the BM diagram is a parabola of second
14. The SFD and BMD for a beam are shown in the degree. (ESE-1996)
given figure I and II. The corresponding loading
diagram would be (ESE-1995)
18. If the loads and reactions of the beam shown are as
given in the following figure. The thrust diagram on
1t 4 tm 1 tm
1t 2 tm the section of the beam, taking tension positive, will
be (ESE-1996)
1m 1m
1t 2 tm 1t
(a) 2 tm (b)
A C B
B A
1m C 1m 1m 1m
1t (d) 2 tm 1 t
(c) 2 tm
A B A C B
1m 1m 1m 1m
Codes:
2 T 4.242 T 6.928 T
A B C D A B C D
3.222T 3.464 T 4.242 T 4T (a) 4 3 2 1 (b) 1 3 2 4
5.87 T 7.3 T (c) 2 3 1 4 (d) 2 4 1 3
1m 1.5 m 2m 1.5 m
(a) 4 4 20. For the beam shown in the given figure, the
3.222 maximum positive bending moment is equal to
+
A + C D B
− E
negative bending moment. The value of L1is
0.242 (ESE-1996)
W/m
0.242
(b) A + + E B
− C D
−
3.222 L1 L L1
4 4
(c) 0.242
A + D E B L L
(a) (b)
− 2 3
3.222 −
C
4 4
L L
(c) 2 (d)
(d) 0.242 E 2 2
A + B
C D − 3.222
−
4 4
21. For the shear force diagram shown in the given
19. Match List-I with List –II and select the correct figure. (ESE-1996)
answer using the codes given below the lists: 14 t
(ESE-1996) 9t
List –I
(Type of beam with bending) A D B C 3t
4m 8m 4m
4t
(a) (c) W 16t
L The loaded beam will be

L
w/m (d) w/m
(b) (a) 18 t 1.5 t/m 3t 14 t 1.5 t/m 3t
(b)
L L
4m 4m 8m 4m
4m 8m
List –II
(d)
(Maximum bending moment value) (c)
10 t 1.5 t/m 3 t 1.5 t/m 14 t 3t
wL2 wL2
1. 12 2. 6
4m 8m 4m 4m 8m 4m
wL2 wL2
3. 2 4. 8
170 Solid Mechanics
22. Match List-I with List –II and select correct answer 24. If the area under the shear curve for a beam between
using codes given below the lists: (ESE-1996) the two points X1 and X2 is k, then the difference
List –I between the moments at the two points X1 and X2
(Type and position of force on cantilever) will be equal to (ESE-1997)
A. Carrying linearly varying load from zero at its (a) k (b) 2 k (c) k/2 (d) k2
free end and maximum at the fixed end
B. Subjected to uniformly distributed load 25. Which one of the following statements is NOT
C. Carrying concentrated load at its free end correct? (ESE-1998)
D. Whose free end is subjected to a couple (a) A bending moment diagram can have a
List-II change of slope only under a transverse load
(Shape of bending moment diagram for a (b) The bending moment is maximum where the
cantilever) shear force is zero
1. Parabola 2. Rectangle (c) A non-linear bending moment diagram is
3. Cubic parabola 4. Triangle possible only in the distributed load regions
Codes: (d) At every support of a continuous beam, the
A B C D A B C D maximum values of negative bending moment
(a) 1 2 3 4 (b) 4 3 2 1 in the span are experienced
(c) 3 1 4 2 (d) 1 3 4 2
26. For a cantilever AB with damped end A and subject
to concentrated load, the shape of the bending
23. Match List- I (type of beam with type of loading)
moment diagram is shown in the adjacent figure.
with List-II (max. BM formula) and select the
The diagram is (ESE-1998)
correct answer using the codes given below the
lists:
L L
List –I A B
(a) (b)
W/m
L (a) an absurdity
(d) W/m (b) possible only if the free end B has an additional
(c)
W
couple
(c) possible only if the left half of the beam has
L twice the moment of inertia as compared to
L
that of the right half
List-II
(d) none of the above

wL2 wL2
1. 2.
12 6 27. Consider the following statements: A simply-
wL 2
wL 2
supported beam is subjected to a couple somewhere
3. 2 4. 8 in the span. It would produce
Codes:
1. a rectangular SF diagram
A B C D A B C D
2. parabolic BM diagram
(a) 2 3 1 4 (b) 1 2 3 4
3. both +ve and −ve BMs which are maximum at
(c) 4 3 1 2 (d) 2 1 4 3
the point of application of the couple.
Of these statements (ESE-1998) (a) 0.333 m 5 kN

(a) 1,2 and 3 correct (b) 1 and 2 are correct (b) 0.666 m 1m
B
(c) 2 and 3 are correct (d) 1 and 3 are correct (c) 0.25 m A C
(d) 0.75 m 0.75 m
8 kN
28. A beam of length 10 m carries a udl of 20 kN/m over
its entire length and rests on two simple supports. In 31. The beam shown in the given figure has a design
order that the maximum BM produced in the beam bending moment value of (ESE-1999)
is the least possible, the supports must be placed
from the ends at a distance of (ESE-1998) 4 kNm
4 kNm 2 kNm
(a) 5.86 m (b) 4.14 m (c) 2.93 (d) 2.07 A
B C
0.5 m 4m
29. A simply supported beam is shown in the given
figure (ESE-1999) (a) 8 kNm (b) 6 kNm (c) 4 kNm (d) 2 kNm
20 kN 10 kN/m
32. A beam’s S.F.D. and B.M.D. are shown in figure-I
2m 2m
and figure -II Uniform
Line
4m
10 kNm − 10 kNm
(a) SFD + Fig-1
30 kN 30 kN
− (SFD) Fig-ll
40 kNm (BMD)
BMD + The corresponding load diagram will be
(ESE-1999)
(b)
SFD 10 kN
(a) 10 kNm (b) 10 kNm
10 kN 30 kN 10 kNm
40 kNM 4m 4m
BMD
+ (c) 10 kNm 10 kNm (d) 10 kNm 10 kNm
(c)
SFD 1m 2m 1m 1m 2m 1m
30 kNm + 10 kN
10 kN − 30 kN
40 kNm 33. The bending moments at a point A, B and C of the

BMD + beam shown in the given figure will be
(ESE-1999)
(d)
Unsupported
SFD 10 kN
30 kNm + hinge
− 30 kN 4 kN 4 kN
10 kN
40 kNm
A B C
BMD + 2.5 m 2.5 m 2.5 m 2.5 m
(a) 10 kNm, 10 kNm and 10kNm

30. The beam ABC shown in the given figure is (b) 10 kNm, 10 kNm and – 10 kNm
horizontal. The distance to the point of contraflexure (c) 20 kNm, 10 kNm and –10 kNm
from the end A is (ESE-1999) (d) 10 kNm,– 10 kNm and 20 kNm
172 Solid Mechanics
34. The bending moment diagram of the beam shown 36. A loaded beam PQRS is shown in the given figure.
in figure – I is (ESE-1999) The magnitude of reaction at R will be zero if the
W/unit length
value of load ‘W’ is (ESE-2000)
l/2 l l/2
12kN W
B Wl /8
2
(a) A B C D (b) A C D
Q R
Wl2/2 Wl2/8 P S
A B
(c) A B C D (d)
C D 2m 6m 2m

Wl2/8
−Wl2/8 (a) 2 kN (b) 2.5 kN
−Wl2/4
−Wl2/8
(c) 3 kN (d) 6 kN
37. A unique relation between bending moment (M)

and intensity of load (w) acting continuously on a
35. A beam ABC has simply supported span AB and
beam of span (L) at a distance (x) along the axis
overhanging span BC. The bending moment
(The flexural rigidity of beam is EI) is given by
diagram for the beam is given in the following
(ESE-2001)
figure: The loading diagram for the beam would
correspond to (ESE-2000) wL2 d2 M
(a) M = 12 (b) w =
dx2
WL/4
d2 M wL2
E B C
(c) M = EI (d) 12
dx2
A D
WL/4
WL/4
38. Assertion (A): The bending moment at a section of

L/2 L/2 L/4 L/2 a simply supported beam is a maximum(ESE-2001)
(i) in the case of a concentrated load, where the
2W W W/2 SF changes sign.
(a) A D E B C (ii) in the case of UDL where shearing force is
zero.
L/2 L/2 L/4 L/2
Reason (R) : Actually in both the above cases
2W W W/2 shearing force should be zero at the section of
(b) B
A
C maximum bending
D E dM= =
dx F 0, satisfy the maxima condition.
L/2 L/2 L/4 L/2
2W W W/2 39. Neglecting self weight, which of the following

(c)
B C beams will have points of contra flexure?
A D E
(ESE-2002)
L/2 L/2 L/4 L/2 (a) A simply supported beam with uniformly
distributed load over part of the structure
(d) 2W W W/2
(b) An overhanging beam with loading only over
B C
A D E supported span and not on overhangs
L/2 L/2 L/4 L/2 (c) Fixed beam subjected to concentrated load
(d) Cantilever beam subjected to uniformly
varying load with zero load at free end
40. The shear force diagram of a beam is shown in the 44. The diagram below shows a simply supported beam
figure. with load.
The absolute maximum bending moment in the 100 kN/m
beam is (ESE-2002)
7P 7P
1m 1m
+ Which one of the following diagrams is the shear
force diagram for this beam? (ESE-2004)
+ 2P
(a)
− 2P 25
5P − 5P
75
a a 2a a (b)
75
25
(a) (2P×a) (b) (5P×a)
(c) (5P×a) (d) (7P×a)
75
(c)
41. If the shear force diagram of a simply supported
25
beam is parabolic if (ESE-2003)
(a) uniformly distributed load (d)
(b) concentrated load at mid span

75
(c) external moment acting at mid span 25
(d) linearly varying distributed load
42. The bending moment for which the beam shown 45. In which one of the following, the point of contra
below is to be designed is (ESE-2003) flexure will NOT occur ? (ESE-2004)
100 kN/m (a) A two span continuous beam of equal spans,
simply supported and loaded by UDL over
both spans.
2m 8m 2m
(b) A simply supported beam loaded by UDL.
(a) 200 kNm (b) 800 kNm (c) A fixed beam loaded by UDL.
(c) 600 kNm (d) 640 kNm (d) A propped cantilever loaded by UDL.
43. Assertion (A): A horizontal beam hinged at one
end and freely supported at the other end will be in 46. What are the support reactions at the fixed end of
static equilibrium under inclined load applied on it. the cantilever beam shown in the diagram below?
Reason (R): The hinged end will offer resistance to (ESE-2004)
the horizontal component of the applied force. (a) 120 kN, 120 kN-m
Total load 120 kN
(ESE-2003) (b) 120 kN, 240 kN-m
(c) 240 kN, 120 kN-m
(d) 120 kN, 60 kN-m
3m
174 Solid Mechanics
47. For shear force to be uniform throughout the span 51. What is the bending moment at A for the bent
of a simply supported beam, which of the following column shown in the figure given below?
loads should be applied on to the beam ? (ESE-2005)
(ESE-2004) 10 kN
(a) Two equally spaced concentric loads. 1m
(b) A couple at midspan only D E
(c) A couple anywhere in the span 2m
(d) UDL over the entire span
C B
1m
48. Consider the simply supported beam AB subjected
to the point loads of equal magnitude shown in the 4m
diagram below: (ESE-2004)
W W
C D A
A B
L/3 L/3
(a) 40 kN-m (b) 20 kN-m
L
(c) 10 kN-m (d) zero
The portion CD of the beam is
(a) in pure bending 52. The beam shown in the figure given below is
(b) in pure shear subjected to concentrated load and clockwise
(c) having maximum bending moment couple. What is the vertical reaction at A?
(d) having maximum shear force (ESE-2005)
50 kN
A 120 kN-m
49 Consider the following statements : B
C D
Assertion (A): A rectangular element is subjected
4m 2m 2m
to pure shear. This will result in cracks along one
diagonal and crushing along the other diagonal. (a) 10 kN (b) 40 kN (c) 50 kN (d) 30 kN
Reason (R): Pure shear on a rectangular element
results in tension along one diagonal and 53. Couple M is applied at C on simply supported
compression along the other diagonal. Of these beam AB. What is the maximum shear force for the
statements. (ESE-2005) beam? (ESE-2005)

A C B
50. In the propped cantilever shown in the figure given M
below, what are the values of the bending moment
and shear force at the support A? (ESE-2005) 2m 1m
P
B (a) Zero (b) M (c) 2M/3 (d) M/3
A C
54. A cantilever beam AB carries loading as shown in

3a 2a the figure below. Which one of the following is the
(a) 2Pa, P/3 (b) Pa, P SFD for the beam? (ESE-2005)
(c) Pa, P/3 (d) 2Pa, 4P/3
2kN

4kN-m L L
(a) 4 (b) 3
A B
C
L L
(c) 2 (d)
1m 1m 3

57. A uniform beam of span ‘l’ carries a uniformly
(a) distributed load ‘w’ per unit length as shown in the
(b)
2 kN figure given below. The supports are at a distance
3 kN
of ‘x’; from either end. What is the condition for
1 kN the maximum bending moment in the beam to be as
(c)
3 kN
(d) small as possible?
1 kN (ESE-2005)
W/unit length
3 kN 3 kN
X X
L
55. A cantilever is AB is loaded as shown in the figure (a) x = 0.107L (b) x = 0.207L
given below. What is the shape of the bending (c) x = 0.237L (d) x = 0.25L
moment diagram for portion AC? (ESE-2005)
2kN/m 58. Which one of the following is the bending moment
diagram for the vertical cantilever beam loaded as
A B
C shown in the figure below?
10 kN (ESE-2006)
1m 1m
(a) Parabolic D C
5 kN
(b) Linearly varying with maximum value of 2m
0.3 m
bending moment at C B E
(c) Linear with constant bending moment value 0.6 m
from C to A. 3m
(d) Linearly varying with maximum value at A A
56. For the simply supported beam, shown in the figure (a) (b) C
given below, at what distance from the support A, is 3 kN-m
the shear force zero? (ESE-2005)
C
+ 3 kN-m
+ B
B
3 kN-m
W −
A
A B
L
A
176 Solid Mechanics
(c) SFD + C
3 kN-m (d) C
–
C (c)
+ 3 kN-m
B Parabola
B + 3 kN-m BMD
+
– C
A
+ C SFD
A
–
(d)
59. A simply supported beam AB has span L as shown Parabola
in the figure below. Point C is the midspan of the BMD
+
beam. It is subjected to UDL w/unit length, in the
C
portion A to C. Which of the following are the SFD
and BMD for the beam? (ESE-2006)
60. At what distance from left support of the beam
w/unit length shown below, is the shear force zero?
A C B 15 kN/m (ESE-2007)
L/2 L/2
C SFD 2m 2m 1m
+
–
(a) 1m (b) 1.25m (c) 1.5m (d) 2.5m
(a)
Parabola 61. For the simply supported beam in the figure below,
Straight line
C is the centre of the span, C is also the point
+
BMD through which the resultant of the column load W
passes. The column rests on the beam over a small
+ C SFD length δl, symmetrically on either side of C. What
is the shearing force at C? (ESE-2007)
–
(b) W
Parabola

Straight line
+
BMD
A B
C
L/2 L/2
(a) W/2 (b) W/4 (c) W (d) zero
62. What is the inclination of resultant reactions at A

with the vertical for the frame shown in the figure P
below ? (ESE-2007) I I
50 kN A
E
B C
2 3m
I I
A D
L L
0.5 m Each member indicated in dark lines has very large
2m 2.5m
moment of inertia.
PL PL PL PL
(a) 600 (b) 400 (c) 300 (d) 500 (a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 8 (d) 16

63. What is the reaction at the support D of the rigid- 66. What is the bending moment at the end B for
jointed structure shown below? (ESE-2008) the guided beam as shown in the figure below
considering the beam to be held rigidity at B against
C 20 kN rotation and to support a load W ? (ESE-2009)
W
Free end 3m
B D
3m A
Roller hinge L
3m B
WL
(a) Zero (b) 4
A
Fixed hinge WL
(c) 2 (d) WL
3m
(a) 10 kN (b) 20 kN (c) 30 kN (d) 40 kN 67. A simply supported beam AB is loaded as shown in
the figure below. (ESE-2009)
64. Consider the following statements: 4 kN 8 kN-m
Assertion (A): Shearing force may be defined as B
A
the rate of change of loading moment. C
Reason (R) : Shearing force at a section is the
6m 2m
algebraic sum of the forces to the left of the
section. (ESE-2009) What is the SF in kN in the portion AC of the beam?
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 0 (d) 6
65. What is the moment at A for a frame as shown in
figure below ? (ESE-2009) 68. Which one of the following is the correct bending
moment diagram for a propped cantilever beam
shown in figure below? (ESE-2009)
178 Solid Mechanics
70. A simply supported beam is loaded as shown in

30 kN figure below. The bending moment at C is
A B C D (ESE-2010)

Hinge 4kN
4kN-m 4kN-m
C
1m 1m 1m

2m 2m

30 kN-m (a) 4 kN-m (sagging) (b) 4 kN-m (Hogging)
(a)
(c) 8 kN- m (sagging) (d) None
B C D
A 71. The correct bending moment diagram for the column
is (ESE-2011)
30 kN-m A
(b) 15 kN-m l/2

P l/2
B C D
A B Hinge
30 kN-m
15 kN-m l
(c)
B C D C
A
30 kN-m
A A
(a) (b)
(d) 30 kN-m
P P
A 2 2
B C D B B
C P C P
2 4
69. A beam of uniform flexural rigidity supports a set of A A
loads as shown in figure below. (ESE-2009) (c) (d)
P P
10 kN W 10 kN 4
4
B B

R R
2m 4m 2m C P C P
2 4
What is the value of W if the magnitudes of bending
moment at midspan and at support of the beam are
numerically equal ?
(a) 20kN (b) 40kN (c) 60kN (d) 80kN
72. The shear force diagram is as shown below: 74. 1kN/m

2kN-m
38 kN C
A B

2m 2m
A 4m B 4m C 2m D 4m
2 kN
A freely supported beam AB of span 4 m is
12 kN 12 kN 12 kN 12 kN subjected to a UDL of 1 kN/m over the full span
and a moment of 2 kN-m at support A as shown in
The loading diagram for the above shear force the figure. The resulting BM at mid-span C of the
diagram is (ESE-2011) beam will be (ESE-2012)
(a) 1 kN-m (sagging) (b)1 kN-m (hogging)
10 kN 12 kN (c) 2 kN-m (sagging) (d) 2 kN-m (hogging)
(a) 10 kN/m
A B C
D 75.
4m 4m 2m
(b) 12 kN + +
12.5 kN/m
A B C A B C D E
D − −
4m 4m 2m
50 kN Consider the following statements with reference to

3 kN/m
a continuous beam supported at A,C and E for to
(c) A B C D which shear force diagram is shown in the above
figure.
4m 4m 2m There is:
1. A concentrated load acting at point B.
12 kN 2. A concentrated load acting at point D.
10 kN
10 kN/m 3. A uniformly distributed load acting on the
B C D
(d) A portion CE.
Which of these statements are correct? (ESE-2013)
4m 4m 2m
(a) 1,2 and 3 (b) 1 and 2 only
73. A simply supported beam AB is subjected to a (c) 2 and 3 only (d) 1 and 3 only
concentrated load at C, the centre of the span. The
area of the SF diagram form A to C will give 76. Which of the following loads should be applied on
(ESE-2011) simply supported beam, so that the shear force is
(a) BM at C constant throughout its span? (ESE-2013)
(b) Load at S (a) U.D.L over the entire span
(c) SF at C (b) Two concentrated loads equally spaced in the
(d) Difference between BM values at A and C span.
180 Solid Mechanics
(c) A central concentrated load and a U.D.L over 3.

Sudden change in sign of BM at the point of
the entire span. application of the couple.
(d) A couple anywhere in the span. 4. Equal and opposite reactions at supports.
Which of the above statements are correct?
77. Which of the following statements are correct? (ESE – 2015)
1. All load carrying member transmit load (a) 1 and 2 (b) 2 and 3
through basic modes of tension, compression, (c) 3 and 4 (d) 1 and 4
torsion and shear only.
2. Beams carry transverse loads. 81. A beam of overall length l, with equal overhangs
3. Combined loading is a complicated loading. on both sides, carries a uniformly distributed load
4. Nature of internal force decides the aspect of over the entire length. To have numerically equal
combined loading. (ESE-2013) bending moments at the centre of the beam and
(a) 1 and 2 (b) 2 and 3 at its supports, the distance between the supports
(c) 3 and 4 (d) 2 and 4 should be (ESE – 2015)
(a) 0.277 l (b) 0.403l (c)0.586l (d) 0.707 l
78. A rigid bar shown in the figure is hinged at A, is
supported by a rod at B, and carries a load W at C. 82. The bending moment diagram of a beam is shown
in figure.
W C
l/2 l/2 A B D E
A
B C
The resistive force in the rod is (ESE – 2014)

(a) 0.5 W (b) 1.0 W The shear force diagram of the beam is represented
(c) 1.5 W (d) 2.0 W by (ESE – 2015)
E
(a) C
79. The bending moment at C for the beam shown in the
A
figure 2 kN
(b)
D 1.6 m E
1 kN
1.2 m A E
B A (c)

C 1.6 m 3.2 m

(ESE – 2014) A C
E
(a) –3.2 kN-m (b) –4.4 kN-m
(d)
(c) –6.2 kN-m (d) –7.2 kN-m
A
E
80. A simply supported beam is subjected to a couple at
a section within its span. It will produce
C
1. SF diagram of zero magnitude.
2. Uniformly varying triangular BM diagram.
83. The bending moment at A for the beam shown 85. In the analysis of beams subjected to loads, the
below (with BD being a rigid bar) is point with Nil Bending Moment can be a
1. Point of Contraflexure
A 3m B 2. Point of Maximum Shear Force
(Wire) 3. Point of Inflexion
1m Which of the above statements is/are correct?
C
3m D (ESE – 2016)
(a) 1 only (b) 2 only
3kN (c) 3 only (d) 1,2 and 3
(ESE – 2016)
(a) Zero (b) 12 kN-m 86. The bending moments at A for the beam shown
(c) 8 kN-m (d) 6 kN-m below (not to scale) is (ESE – 2016)
A B
84. The bending moment diagram for the beam shown 180 mm 75 mm
below is (ES-2016) C
D E (Rope tied at D 75 mm
B, turnes at fixed
2m 1m 40 kN
point E,and on
A
C B pulley at D) (a) 3200 kN-mm (b) 3600 kN-mm
2 kN
(c) 4200 kN-mm (d) 4800 kN-mm
2 kN-m
87. Consider the following statements with regards to
(a)
the shear force diagram for the beam ABCD:
(ESE – 2017)
4 kN-m
2 kN-m
(b) 50 kN
C 10 kN
4 kN-m A E D B
20 kN
2 kN-m
3.5m 2.5m 2m
(c)
1. The beam ABCD is an overhanging beam
having supports at A and D only.
2. The beam carries a point load of 20 kN at C.
4 kN-m
2 kN-m
3. The beam carries a concentrated load of 10 kN
at the end B.
(d)
4. The beam is an overhanging beam having
supports at C and D only.
5. The beam carries a uniformly distributed load
4 kN-m
of 70 kN over the left hand portion AC only.
Which of the above statements are correct?
182 Solid Mechanics
(a) 1, 2 and 3 only (b) 1, 3 and 5 only (c) Bending moment diagram between the two
(c) 2, 3 and 4 only (d) 2, 4 and 5 only points
(d) M/EI diagram between the two points
88. A horizontal bar of 40 mm diameter solid section is
2.40 m long and is rigidly held at both ends so that no 92. The shear-force diagram of a beam is shown in the
angular rotation occurs axially or circumferentially figure
at the ends (as shown in figure). The maximum
tensile stress in the bar is nearly. (ESE – 2018) + 1000 Ν
+ 800 Ν
250 N 800Ν −
− 1200 Ν
0.5 m
C B The total of the vertically downward loads on the

A
beam is (ESE-2019)
1.2 m 1.2 m
(a) 2600 N (b) 3000 N
(a) 12.2 N/mm 2
(b) 13.7 N/mm 2
(c) 3400 N (d) 3800 N
(c) 15.2 N/mm2 (d) 16.7 N/mm2

89. The shear force diagram of a single overhanging
beam is shown in figure. One simple support is at 01. (b) 02.(c) 03. (b) 04. (d) 05. (b)
end A. The ‘total’ downward load acting on the 06. (a) 07. (c) 08. (b) 09. (a) 10. (a)
beam is (ESE – 2018) 11. (a) 12. (c) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (d)

350N 350N 16. (a) 17. (b) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (d)
+ve 21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (a) 24. (a) 25. (a)
100N +ve 100N
26. (a) 27. (d) 28. (d) 29. (b) 30. (a)
O A Β −ve C D E O
50N 31. (d) 32. (b) 33. (b) 34. (d) 35. (c)
50N
350N 36. (c) 37. (b) 38. (a) 39. (c) 40. (b)
350N
41. (d) 42. (c) 43. (a) 44. (c) 45. (b)
(a) 800 N (b) 600 N
46. (a) 47. (c) 48. (a) 49. (a) 50. (b)
(c) 400 N (d) 200 N
51. (d) 52. (a) 53. (d) 54. (a) 55. (d)
90. Two persons weighing W each are sitting on a plank
56. (d) 57. (b) 58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (c)
of length L floating on water, at L/4 from either d.
Neglecting the weight of the plank, the bending 61. (d) 62. (c) 63. (d) 64. (b) 65. (a)
moment at the middle point of the plank is 66. (c) 67. (c) 68. (a) 69. (b) 70. (d)
(ESE – 2018) 71. (c) 72. (a) 73. (d) 74. (a) 75. (d)
WL WL
(a) 16 (b) 64
76. (d) 77. (d) 78. (d) 79. (b) 80. (c)
WL
(c) 8 (d) Zero 81. (c) 82. (a) 83. (b) 84. (d) 85. (a)
91. The change in shearing force between two points on 86. (c) 87. (b) 88. (d) 89. (a) 90. (d)
the beam is equal to the area of (ESE-2019) 91. (a) 92. (d)
(a) Loading diagram between the two points
(b) Shear force diagram between the two points
Chapter 5 Centroid and Moment of Inertia
01. The distance of centroids of areas above and below

Solutions
the equal area axis in a solid circular section from
its center (R is the radius of circular section )
is 01. Ans: (a)
(ESE-2001) Sol:
4R 4π
(a) 3π (b) 3R y1
EA
y2
3R 3π
(c) 4π (d) 4R

EA = Equal area axis. (which divides entire area
into two equal parts).
4R
Here y1 = y2 = 3π
Chapter 6 Bending Stresses
01. A rectangular beam is to be cut from a circular log allowable stress in wood is σ and modular ratio
of wood of diameter D. The ratio of the two sides of steel to wood is ‘m’. The allowable bending
of the rectangle for strongest section in bending moment is (ESE -1993)
should be (width to depth) (ESE -1992)
t B t
3 1 3
(a) 2 (b) 2 (c) (d) 4
2
02. If the depth of a beam carrying an isolated load at D

the center is doubled, the deflection of the beam at
mid – span will change by a factor of (ESE -1992)
(a) 1/6 (b) 1/4 (c) 1/2 (d) 8
(a) 6 D2 ^B + mth (b) 6 D2 ^B + 2mth
σ σ
03. A T-section is used as a simply supported beam with

(c) 6 D2 ^2B + mth (d) 6 D2 ^2B + 2mth
σ σ
uniform loading. The maximum bending stresses
for a given load will occur at the (ESE -1993) 06. Three smooth wooden battens are placed one above
the other and are subjected to bending moments M
as shown in the given figure. The bending stress
Y1 distribution is given by (ESE-1994)
M M
N A D
Y2
(a) (b)
(a) top of the section
D D
(b) C.G of the section
(c) mid-point of the depth of section
(d) bottom of the section (c) (d)
04. A beam of square cross-section is used to carry a
shear force at supports under a certain system of D D
loading with one side of the square kept vertical.
The beam is now rotated to make one of its
diagonals vertical under system of loading. The
ratio of maximum shear stress intensity at neutral 07. A simply supported beam of span L carries a
axis over the cross-section between the former and concentrated load W at its mid-span. If the width
the later beam is (ESE -1993) b of the beam is constant throughout the span then,
(a) 0.5 (b) 1.0 (c) 1.5 (d) 2.0 when the permissible bending stress is ‘f’, the
beam’s mid-span depth will be (ESE-1994)
05. A wooden beam of width B and depth D is 3WL 3WL
(a) 2bf (b) 2bf
strengthened by two steel plates of thickness ‘t’
and depth ‘D’ on the both sides of the beam. The 6WL 6WL
(c) bf (d) 2bf
194 Solid Mechanics
08. Consider the following statements regarding the

beams and their loading shown in figures I and II.
(a)
Deflection at B of beam in fig. I would equal (b) (c) (d)
1. (1/EI) ×BM of the beam in fig. II
2. (1/EI)× moment of the area about B of BMD
of beam in fig. I
3. (1/EI)× moment of the area BMD) about B of 12. Given that m=Es/Et, It = Moment of inertia of Timber
beam in fig. II portion and Is = Moment of inertia of steel portion,
Of these statements (ESE-1994) the equivalent moment of inertia of a flitched beam
made of steel and timber is given by (ESE-1995)
W/m
A (a) It+(Is/m) (b) Is+(It/m)
B
(c) Is+mIt (d) It+mIs
l
13. A ratio of moment carrying capacity of a circular
B beam of diameter D and square beam of size ‘D’ is
Wl2/2 (ESE-1995)
(a) π/4 (b) 3π/8 (c) π/3 (d) 3π/16
l 14. Assertion (A): I-Section is preferred to rectangular

(a) 1 and 3 are true (b) 1 and 2 are true section for resisting bending moment.
(c) 2 alone is true (d) 1 alone is true Reason (R) : In I-Section more than 80% of bending
moment is resisted by flanges only (ESE-1996)
09. A cantilever beam AB fixed at A and carrying a load
Codes:
W at the free end B, is found to deflect by δ at the
mid-point of AB. The deflection of B due to the
explanation of A
load W/2 at the mid-point will be (ESE-1994)
(a) 2δ (b) δ (c) δ/2 (d) δ/4
explanation of A
10. A steel wire of 20 mm diameter is bent into a circular
shape of 10 m radius. If E the modulus of elasticity
is 2×106 kg/cm2, then the maximum stress induced
15. A simply supported beam of span L carries a
in the wire is (ESE-1995)
concentrated load W at mid-span. If the width b
(a) 103 kg/cm2 (b) 2×103 kg/cm2
of the beam is constant and its depth is varying
(c) 4×103 kg/cm2 (d) 6×103 kg/cm2
throughout the span, then what should be its mid-
span depth, when design stress is f? (ESE-1996)
11. For a square-sectioned beam bent as shown in the

given figure, the exaggerated view of the deformed 6WL 6WL
(a) b (b) b
cross-section is (ESE-1995) f f
3WL 3WL
(c) 2b f (d) 2b f
Beam
195 Bending Stresses
16. The span and the material of the two beams A and 18. A cantilever of constant depth carries a uniformly
B are the same. The area of cross-section of the two distributed load on the whole span. To make the
beams are equal. The cross-section is square. In the maximum stress at all sections the same, the
case of beam A, the plane of moment is parallel to breadth of the section at a distance x from the free
the sides of the square and in the case of beam B, end should be proportional to (ESE-1996)
the plane of moment coincides with the diagonal as (a) x (b) x (c) x
2
(d) x3
shown in the figures.
Consider the following inferences from the above 19. Match List I with List II and select the correct
data: answer using the codes given below the list:
1. For the same loading, the deflection of the (ESE-1997)
beam B is smaller than that of beam A. List – I
2. If the load on the two beams is the same, then A. Moment of intertia B. Elongation
the maximum stress in beam B is greater than C. Neutral axis D. Top fibre
that in beam A. List –II
3. Beam A can resist smaller load than beam B 1. Tensile stress
4. Flexural rigidity of both beams is equal 2. Modulus of rupture
Of these inferences (ESE-1996) 3. Zero shear stress
4. Zero longitudinal stress
h Codes:
a=
2 A B C D A B C D
h
(a) 2 1 3 4 (b) 1 2 4 3
a
(c) 3 4 1 2 (d) 2 1 4 3
h a
20. A flitched beam shown in the below figure is
subjected to a bending moment. The strain variation
across the cross-section will be as in (ESE-1997)
A Plane of moment B
(a) 1 and 3 are incorrect

(b) 1 and 3 are incorrect
(c) 1 and 4 are incorrect
(d) 2,3 and 4 are incorrect
(a) (b)
17. In a simply supported wooden beam under
uniformly distributed load, a hole has to be made in
the breadth wise direction at mid-span to provide a
pipeline. From structural strength point of view, it
would be advisable to have the hole made a
(c) (d)
(a) the bottom (ESE1996)
(b) the top
(c) mid-depth
(d) ¼ depth either from the top or the bottom
196 Solid Mechanics
21. The ratio of the flexural strengths of two beams of 26. For the flitched beam shown in the below figures
square cross-section, the first beam being placed I and II, for the same value of maximum bending
with its top and bottom sides horizontally and stress in timber.
the second beam being placed with one diagonal
horizontal, is (ESE-1997)
1 1 5
(a) 3 (b) (c) (d) 2 5
3 2 5
22. A simply supported beam of span carries a point load

W at midspan. The breadth b of the beam along the 200 100 200
entire span is constant. Given, f-permissible stress
is bending, for a beam of uniform strength, the
depth of the beam at any cross-section at distance x 100
5 Fig-ll
from the support would be (ESE-1997)
100
]6Wxg ]6Wxg Fig-1
(a) fb (b) fb
(a) MR1>MR2 (ESE-1998)
]3Wxg ]3Wxg
(c) fb (d) fb (b) MR2>MR1
(c) MR1 = MR2
23. Assertion (A): Two beams, one placed directly over (d) MR1 & MR2 can not be compared
the other have total moment of resistance equal to
the sum of the moments of resistance of individual 27. A cylindrical bar of 20 mm diameter and 1 m length
sections. is subjected to a tensile test. Its longitudinal strain
Reason (R): In bending, the transverse sections is 4 times that of its lateral strain. If the modulus
which were plane before bending remain plane after of elasticity is 2×105 N/mm2, then its modulus of
bending as well. (ESE-1998) rigidity will be (ESE-1999)
(a) 8×10 N/mm
6 2
(b) 8×10 N/mm2
5
24. A rectangular timber beam is cut out of a cylindrical (c) 0.8×104 N/mm2 (d) 0.8×105 N/mm2
log of diameter D. The depth of the strongest timber
28. A simply supported beam of constant width and
beam will be (ESE-1998)
varying depth and uniform strength is subjected
1 2 to a central concentrated load. The depth of the
(a) 2 D (b) 3D beam dx at a distance x from one of the supports is
5 3 proportional to (ESE-1999)
(c) 8 D (d) 4D (a) x1/2 (b) x1/3 (c) x (d) x2
25. A high strength steel band-saw of 90 mm width

29. A mild steel fleet of width 120 mm and thickness
and 0.5 mm thickness runs of over a pulley of 500
10 mm is bent into an arc of a circle of radius 10 m
mm diameter. Assuming E=200 GPa, the maximum
by applying a pure moment M. If E is 2×105 N.mm2,
flexural stress developed would be (ESE-1998)
then the magnitude of the pure moment M will be
(a) 100 MPa (b) 200 MPa
(ESE-1999)
(c) 400 MPa (d) 500 MPa
(a) 2×10 N-mm
6
(b) 2×10 N-mm
5
(c) 0.2×105 N-mm (d) 0.2×104 N-mm
30. The cross-section of a beam is shown in figure. I its

y
Ixx is equal to 3×106 mm4. It is subjected to a load cutoff
as shown in figure-II maximum tensile stress in the
beam would be (ESE-1999)
x x
y1=70 mm 0.3 kN 0.3 kN

cutoff

X X y
3m 4m 3m
y2=50 mm
(a) stresses in the beam
(b) stresses and reduces the weight of the beam
(c) the moment of inertia of the beam
(a) indeterminable as data is insufficient (d) the section modulus
(b) 21 MN/m2
(c) 21 kN/m2 33. A test is conducted on a beam loaded by end couples.
(d) 21 N/m2 The fibres at layer CD are found to lengthen by 0.03
mm and fibres at layer AB shorten by 0.09 mm is
31. A timber beam of 100 mm width and 200 mm depth 20 mm gauge length as shown in the figure. Taking
is reinforced with two steel plates of 100 mm width E =2×105 N/mm2, the flexural stress at top fibres
and 5 mm thickness as shown figure I and figure -II would be (ESE-2000)
100mm 100mm
5mm 50 mm
5mm C D
100mm
100 mm
200mm

A B
75 mm
fig (1) fig (2)
Which one of the following statements is correct for (a) 900 N/mm2 tensile
the same value of bending stress in the timber? (b) 1000 N/mm2 tensile
(ESE-1999) (c) 1200 N/mm2 tensile
(a) Moment of resistance in figure I will be more (d) 1200 N/mm2 compressive
than that in figure II
(b) Moment of resistance in figure-II will be more 34. A cantilever beam is 2m long. The cross-section of
than that in figure-I the beam is hollow square, with external sides 60
(c) Moment of resistance in figure-I will be equal mm and the internal side is such that I=6×105 mm4.
to that in figure-II If the safe bending stress for the material is 100
(d) No logical comparison can be made N/mm2, the safe concentrated load at the free end
would be (ESE-2000)
32. In the case of a square beam subjected to couples (a) 400 N (b) 500 N
acting about X-X axis, it is advisable to cut off the (c) 600 N (d) 1000 N
edges and keep the section as shown in the given
figure because it increases (ESE-2000)
198 Solid Mechanics
35. Which of the following points are considered while 39. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct

M f
deriving the formula I= y= R
E answer using the codes given below the lists:
List –I
1. Type of material A. Assumption in the theory of simple bending
2. Transverse shear force B. The point at which the bending stress is
3. The stresses in the remaining principal maximum for any cross-section
direction C. The point at which the bending stress is zero
4. σy = σz = τxz = τzx = 0 for any cross-section
5. Linear variation of strain D. The point in the cross-section through which
Select the correct answer using the codes given the neutral axis passes
below: (ESE-2001) List-II
(a) 1, 2 and 4 (b) 2, 3 and 5 1. Neutral axis
(c) 4 and 5 (d) 1 and 3 2. Centroid
3. The plane sections remain plain
36. Out of two beams of same material and same 4. Extreme fibre
cross-sectional area one is of circular cross-section 5. The cross section is circular (ESE-2002)
and other is of square cross-section. If these are Codes:
subjected to bending moment of same magnitude, A B C D A B C D
then (ESE-2001) (a) 5 4 1 2 (b) 3 1 2 4
(a) both section would be equally strong (c) 5 1 2 4 (d) 3 4 1 2
(b) both sections would be equally economical
(c) square section would be more economical than 40. The figure shows the cross-section of a flitched beam
circular section consisting of a steel plate sandwiched between two
(d) square section would be less economical than wooden blocks. The second moment of area of the
circular section composite beam about the neutral axis XX is
(ESE-2003)
37. Assertion (A): A beam of fixed length and for Steel plate
given weight of material, a rectangular cross-
section provides the greatest possible moment of
resistance. wood
h/2
Reason (R): In a beam of I cross section, more
material is positioned near the outer fibres X X
representing regions of greats stress and hence is
h/2
stronger than beam of rectangular cross-section.
(ESE-2002)
t
b+t
38. Assertion (A): The strength of a beam does not
directly depend upon the sectional area provided.
bh3 mth3 bh3 t ]mhg3
Reason (R): It depends upon the position of the (a) 12 + 12 (b) 12 + 12
sectional area of the beam in relation to its neutral
(c) ^b + th 12
h3 bh3
axis. (ESE-2002) (d) 12
41. Consider the following statements for a beam based (b) At the junction of flange and web
on theory of bending: (c) At the mid-depth point
1. Strain developed in any fibre is directly (d) At the bottom of the section
proportional to the distance of fibre from
neutral surface. 45. A structural beam subjected to sagging bending has
2. For flexural loading and linearly elastic action a cross-section which is an unsymmetrical I-section.
the neutral axis passes through the centroid of The overall depth of the beam is 300mm. The flange
cross-section. stresses in the beam are: (ESE-2009)
3. The assumption of the plane cross-section σtop = 200 N/mm 2
σbottom = 50 N/mm2
remaining plane will not hold good during What is the height in mm of the neutral axis above
inelastic action. the bottom flange?
4. Instances in which the neutral axis does not (a) 240mm (b) 60mm
pass through the centroid of a cross-section (c) 180mm (d) 120mm
include a homogenous symmetrical beam
(with respect to neutral axis) and subjected to 46. A square section as shown in the figure below is
inelastic action. (ESE-2004) subjected to bending moment M. (ESE-2009)
Which of these statements are correct?
(a) 1,2,3 and 4 (b) 1,2, and 4 y
(c) 3 and 4 (d) 1 and 2
42. A beam has the same section throughout its length

x x h
with I = 1 × 108mm4. It is subjected to a uniform
BM = 40 kN-m. E = 2×105 N/mm2. What is the
radius of curvature of these circle into which the
beam will bend in the form of an arc of a circle ? y
(ESE-2005)
h
(a) 100 m (b) 500 m (c) 400 m (d) 350 m
What is the maximum bending stress ?
43. A 20cm long rod of uniform rectangular section,
12M 6M
8mm wide × 1.2mm thick is bent into the form of (a) σ bc = σ bt = (b) σ bc = σ bt = 3
h3 h
a circular arc resulting in a central displacement
9M 9M
of 0.8mm. Neglecting second-order quantities in (c) σ bc = σ bt = (d) σ bc = σ bt = 3
2h3 h
computations, what is the longitudinal surface
strain (approximate) in the rod? (ESE-2007)
(a) 7.2 × 10–4 (b) 8.4 × 10–4 47. A square beam laid flat is then rotated in such a way
(c) 9.6 × 10–4 (d) 10.8 × 10–4 that one of its diagonal becomes horizontal. How is
its moment capacity affected ? (ESE-2009)
44. A cantilever beam of T cross-section carries (a) Increases by 41.4%
uniformly distributed load. Where does the (b) Increases by 29.27%
maximum magnitude of the bending stress occur? (c) Decreases by 29.27%
(ESE-2007) (d) Decreases by 41.4%
(a) At the top of cross-section
200 Solid Mechanics
48. A beam of un-symmetrical I-section, made of 52. A steel beam replaced by a corresponding
structural steel has an overall depth of 300 mm. If aluminium beam of same cross-sectional shape and
the flange stresses developed at the top and bottom dimensions, and is subjected to same loading. The
of the beam are 1200 kg/cm3 and 300 kg/cm3 maximum bending stress will (ESE-2010)
respectively, then the depth of neutral axis from the (a) be unaltered
top of the beam would be (ESE-2010) (b) increase
(a) 250 mm (b) 240 mm (c) decrease
(c) 200 mm (d) 180 mm (d) vary in proportion to their modulus of
elasticity
49. A simply supported beam of T-section is subjected
to a uniformly distributed load acting vertically 53. A simply supported beam of span L carries a
downward. Its neutral axis is located at 25 mm concentrated load W at its mid-span. If the width b
from the top of the flange and the total depth of the of the beam is constant throughout the span, then,
section is 100 mm. The ratio of maximum tensile with permissible stress as σ, the depth of the beam
stress to maximum compressive stress in the beam at mid-span will be (ESE-2012)
is (ESE-2010)
3WL 3WL
(a) 2.0 (b) 2.5 (c) 3.0 (d) 4.0 (a) 2bσ (b) 2bσ
6WL 6WL
50. Consider the following statements for a beam of (c) bσ (d) bσ
rectangular cross-section and uniform flexural
rigidity EI subjected to pure bending: 54. Out of the two beams of the same material and same
1. The bending stresses have the maximum cross-sectional area, one is of circular cross-section
magnitude at the top and bottom of the cross- and the other is of square cross-section. If each of
section. these is subjected to bending moment of the same
2. The bending stresses vary linearly through the magnitude, then (ESE-2012)
depth of c/s. (a) both sections would be equally strong.
3. The bending stresses vary parabolically (b) both sections would be equally economical
through the depth of the cross-section. (c) square section would be more economical
Which of these statements is/are correct? than circular section
(ESE-2010) (d) square section would be less economical than
(a) 1,2 and 3 (b) 1 only circular section
(c) 2 only (d) 1 and 2 only
55. A rectangular beam of dimensions b×d is to be cut
51. Two beams carrying identical loads, simply from a circular log of wood of diameter D. For the
supported, are having same depth but beam A has beam to be strongest in bending, the dimensions
double the width as compared to that of beam B. will be (ESE-2013)
The ratio of the strength of beam A to that of beam
D 2 D 2
B is (ESE-2010) (a) and D 3 (b) and D 3
2 3
(a) 1/2 (b) 1/4 (c) 2 (d) 4
D 2D D 2D
(c) and 3 (d) and 3
2 3
56. A simply supported rolled steel joist of I-section has Codes:

flange width 250 mm and overall depth 600 mm. (a) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are
Its moment of inertia IXX= 12×108 mm4. The steel individually true and Statement (II) is the
joist is used as a beam over a simply supported correct explanation of Statement (I)
span of 6 m. It carries a load of 40 kN/m including (b) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are
its self weight throughout the span. The maximum individually true but statement (II) is not the
stress induced in the beam in N/mm2 due to bending correct explanation of statement (I)
would be (ESE-2013) (c) Statement (I) is true but Statement (II) is false
(a) 30 (b) 90 (c) 45 (d) 60 (d) Statement (I) is false but Statement (II) is true
57.
59. A simply supported beam has uniform cross-section,
b b = 100 mm, d = 200 mm, throughout its length. The
beam is subjected to a maximum bending moment
of 6 ×107 N-mm. The corresponding bending stress
d/2 developed in the beam is (ESE – 2014)
(a) 30 N/mm2 (b) 60 N/mm2
(c) 90 N/mm2 (d) 120 N/mm2
d/2 60. A steel plate is bent into a circular arc of radius

10 m. If the plate section be 120 mm wide and 20
mm thick, with E = 2×105 N/mm2, then the maximum
bending stress induced is (ESE – 2014)
The above figure represents a section of a pre–
(a) 210 N/mm 2
(b) 205 N/mm2
stressed beam. For a no-tension design where sc is
(c) 200 N/mm2 (d) 195 N/mm2
the permissible stress in concrete, the total moment
carrying capacity is (ESE – 2013) 61. A fletched beam composed of two different pieces,
each having breadth b and depth d, supports an
bd2 σ bd2 σ external load. This statement implies that
(a) 3 c (b) 4 c
1. the two different materials are rigidly
bd2 σ c bd2 σ c connected
(c) 6 (d) 12
2. there will be relative movement between the
58. Statement (I): A simply supported beam AB of two materials.
constant EI throughout, when subjected to pure 3. for transforming into an equivalent
terminal couples as shown in figure, will bend into single material section under‘ strength’
an arc of a circle. considerations, the depth is kept constant and
only the breadth is varied (ESE – 2014)
M A B M Which of the above statements are correct?
(a) 1 and 2 only (b) 1 and 3 only
(c) 2 and 3 only (d) 1,2 and 3
L
Statement (II): Theory of simple bending 62. A shear wall of length 5 m, height 3 m and thickness
establishes relationships from among M,f,R,y,E and 250 mm has to resist the forces due to horizontal
I. (ESE – 2014) earthquake in its plane. The relevant Section
Modulus of the wall section is (ESE – 2015)
202 Solid Mechanics
(a) 3.75 × 108 mm3 (b)10.41 × 108 mm3 are 120 N/mm2 and 80 N/mm2, respectively. The
(c) 31.25 × 106 mm3 (d)75 × 108 mm3 depth of the neutral axis from the top of the beam
63. A mild steel structural section is an unsymmetrical
(a) 120 mm (b) 100 mm
I-section, with the greater width at the top and the
(c) 80 mm (d) 60 mm
smaller width at the bottom. The overall depth of
the beam is 300 mm, and the flange stresses at the
67. The bending stress in a T- beam section is maximum
top and the bottom of the beam are 150 N/mm2 and
1. At top fibre
50 N/mm2, respectively. What is the height of the
2. At centroidal fibre
neutral axis of the beam from its bottom?
3. At bottom fibre (ESE - 2016)
(ESE – 2015)
(a) 1 only
(a) 125 mm (b) 100 mm
(b) 2 only
(c) 75 mm (d) 50 mm
(c) 3 only
(d) At a level which is dependent on the loading
64. A thin steel ruler having its cross-section of 0.0625
condition
cm × 2.5 cm is bent by couples applied at its ends

so that its length 'l' equal to 25 cm, when bent, as a
68. The span of a cantilever beam is 2 m. The cross-
circular arc, subtends a central angle θ = 60o. Take
section of the beam is a hollow square with external
E = 2 × 106 kg/cm2. The maximum stress induced in
sides 100 mm; and its I = 4 × 105 mm4. The safe
the ruler and the magnitude is (ESE – 2016)
bending stress for the beam material is 100 N/mm2.
(a) 2618 kg/cm2 (b) 2512 kg/cm2
The safe concentrated load at the free end would
(c) 2406 kg/cm2 (d) 2301 kg/cm2
be (ESE - 2017)
(a) 100 N (b) 200 N (c) 300 N (d) 400 N
65. In order that the extreme fibre stresses in bending
will be in the ratio 4 : 3 in the beam shown in the
69. A homogeneous prismatic simply supported beam
following figure, the width b of the upper flange
is subjected to a point load F. The load can be placed
(b < 10 cm) of the beam section is to be
anywhere along the span of the beam. The very
b maximum flexural stress developed in the beam is
2.5 cm
F
2.5 cm 10 cm B
D
2.5 cm
10 cm
L
(ESE – 2016)
(a) 6.1 cm (b) 6.6 cm (c) 5.1 cm (d) 5.6 cm (ESE - 2017)
3FL 3FL
(a) (b)
2BD2 4BD2
66. A structural steel beam has an unsymmetrical
2FL 4FL
I-cross-section. The overall depth of the beam is (c) (d)
3BD2 3BD2
200 mm. The flange stresses at the top and bottom
70. A timber beam, 100 mm wide and 150 mm deep,

b ^D2 − b2h = bD2 − b3
supports a UDL over a span of 2 m. If the safe Z= 6 6
stresses are not to exceed 28 MPa in bending and 2
MPa in shear, the maximum load that the beam can dz = D2 − 3b2 =
db 6 0
support is (ESE-2019)

3b2 = D2
(a) 16 kN/m (b) 20 kN/m b = 1
(c) 24 kN/m (d) 28 kN/m D 3
Substituting in (1)
KEY & Detailed Solutions =b 1

= h
and D
2
h 2 3
01.(c) 02.(d) 03. (d) 04. (c) 05. (b)
[The student should remember this relations]
06. (c) 07. (b) 08. (a) 09. (c) 10. (b)
11.(d) 12. (b & d) 13. (d) 14. (a) 15. (c) 02. Ans: (d)
Sol: y \ I ; y \ 3 ba I = bd l
16. (b) 17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (d) 20. (b) 1 1 3
d 12
21. (d) 22. (d) 23. (b) 24. (b) 25. (b)
26. (a) 27. (d) 28. (a) 29. (b) 30. (b) When depth is doubled, deflection decrease by 8
times.
31. (a) 32. (d) 33. (a) 34. (d) 35. (c)
36. (c) 37. (d) 38. (a) 39. (d) 40. (a) 03. Ans: (d)
41. (a) 42. (b) 43. (c) 44. (d) 45. (b) Sol:
46. (b) 47. (c) 48. (b) 49. (c) 50. (d)
51. (c) 52. (a) 53. (b) 54. (c) 55. (b)
56. (c) 57. (c) 58. (a) 59. (c) 60. (c)
61. (b) 62. (c) 63. (c) 64. (a) 65. (d) Ymax
66. (a) 67. (c) 68. (d) 69. (a) 70. (b) fmax

01. Ans: (c) Maximum bending stress occurs at a fibre which is
b
Sol: far away from neutral axis.
h D Here, the bottom fibre is far away from neutral axis.
∴ Maximum bending stress occurs at bottom fibre.

Diameter of wooden log = D 04. Ans: (c)
For strongest rectangle to be cut in a circular log Sol:
bh2
z = 6 should be maximum

Substitute D2 = b2 + h2
h2 = D2 – b2 → (1) (1) (2)

]τ NAgsquare = 6τ max@square = 32 6τ avg@ = 3: F D
dz
For 'Z' to be maximum db = 0
2 bd
Chapter 7 Shear Stresses
01. The shear stress distribution over a rectangular 05. An overhang beam of uniform EI is loaded as
cross-section of a beam follows (ESE -1993) shown in the below figure. The deflection at the free
(a) a straight line path (b) a circular path end will be (ESE-1998)
(c) a parabolic path (d) an elliptical path P
02. A beam has triangular cross-section, having base ‘b’

and altitude ‘h’. If a section of the beam is subjected L/3 L
to a shear force F, the shear stress at the level of
PL3 PL3 4PL3 2PL3
neutral axis in the cross-section is given by (a) 81EI (b) 27EI (c) 81EI (d) 27EI
(ESE-1995)
4F 3F
(a) 3bh (b) 4bh 06. The shear stress distribution shown in figure-I
represents a beam with cross-section
8F 3F
(c) 3bh (d) 8bh (ESE-1999)
03. Assertion (A): A beam of circular cross-section

in comparison to rectangular section of the same
material but of equal cross-sectional area can resist (a) (b)
a larger shear force.
Reason (R): The maximum intensities of shear
stress in the sections of a beam of circular cross-
(c) (d)
1
section and of a rectangular cross-section are 1 3
1
times and 1 2 times the average shear stress
respectively. (ESE-1996)
Codes:
07. A simply supported I beam with its web horizontal
is shown in the given figure. It is subjected to a
explanation of A
vertical load. (ESE-2000)
explanation of A
The shape of the shear stress distribution in the
04. A beam of square cross-section (B×B) is used as a
cross-section of the beam under the load would be
beam with one diagonal horizontal. The location of (c) (d)
(a) (b)
the maximum shear stress from the neutral axis will
be at distance of (ESE-1998)
B B B
(a) zero (b) 4 (c) (d) 8
4 2
214 Solid Mechanics
08. Which one of the following shear stress distribution 11. A beam has a triangular cross-section having base 40
diagrams is correct for cross-bar section shown in mm and altitude 60 mm. If this section is subjected
the given figure-I? (ESE-2001) to a shear force of 36000 N, the maximum shear
stress in the cross-section would be (ESE-2001)
(a) 60 N/mm2 (b) 36 N/mm2
(c) 45 N/mm2 (d) 30 N/mm2

The shear stress over a beam section of any shape
for a given loading does not vary with
1. shear force at the section
(a) (b) (c) (d) 2. area of section
3. moment of inertia of the section
(a) 1 and 2 (b) 1 and 3 (c) 2 and 3 (d) 1,2 and 3
13. A rectangular beam of width 200 mm and depth 300

mm is subjected to a shear force of 200 kN. The
09. A rectangular beam of width 100 mm is subjected to maximum shear stress produced in the beam is
a maximum shear force of 60 kN. The corresponding (ESE-2002)
maximum shear stress in the cross-section is 4 N/ (a) 10.0 MPa (b) 7.5 MPa
mm2. The depth of the beam should be (c) 5.0 MPa (d) 3.33 MPa
(ESE-2001)
(a) 150 mm (b) 225 mm 14. The shear stress distribution for a rectangular section
(c) 200 mm (d) 100 mm under the action of shear force S is shown below.
The rectangular section is b×d. Select the correct
10. Consider the following statements: shear stress distribution from the following:
When a beam of square cross-section is used with a (ESE-2003)
diagonal in a vertical position, s
1. the shear stress distribution across the section 3bd (b) 2s
of the beam will be maximum at the neutral (a) 3bd
axis
d
2. the shear stress distribution across the section d
of the beam will be zero both at top and bottom
3. the maximum stress does not occur at neutral
axis. (c) (d)
3s 3s
2bd 4bd
(a) 1,2 and 3 (b) 1 and 3
d d
(c) 2 and 3 (d) 1 and 2
215 Shear Stresses
15. The maximum shear stress produced in a shaft is 5 1

N/mm2. The shaft is of 40mm diameter. What is the 2
approximate value of twisting moment?
(ESE-2004)
(a) 628 N-m (b) 63 N-m
(c) 126 N-m (d) 251 N-m 3
1 1
16. What is the ratio of maximum shear stress to average (a) (b)
shear stress for a circular section? (ESE-2005) 2 2
(a) 2 (b) 2/3 (c) 4/3 (d) 3/4
17. A horizontal beam shown in the figure given below

is subjected to transverse loading. Which one of the
following diagrams represents the distribution of
3 3
shear force along the cross-section?
(ESE-2006) (c) 1 2 (d) 1
2
D
Neutral axis
N A
3 3
t
19. A beam of square cross-section is placed horizontally

B
with one diagonal horizontal as shown in the figure
(a) (b) below. It is subjected to a vertical shear force acting
along the depth of the cross section. Maximum
D Neutral axis D Neutral axis shear stress across the depth of cross section occurs
at a depth ‘x’ from the top. What is the value of x?
t t (ESE-2006)

(c) (d) 2
D 3D
3 4
Neutral axis Neutral axis D A A
B B
D C
B B
D A A
t 3D 2
D
4 3
18. Which one of the following diagrams indicates the

shear stress distribution for the beam as shown in (a) x = 0 (b) x = (2/3)D
the figure below? (ESE-2006) (c) x = (3/4)D (d) x = D
216 Solid Mechanics
20. At what value of the ultimate shear strength, shall the (c) shear force is constant
material under the action of uniform axial tension (d) bending moment is constant
fail due to shear? (ESE-2007)
25. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct
(a) <0.5 times the ultimate tensile strength
answer using the code given below the lists:
(b) <0.7 times the ultimate tensile strength
List-I (ESE-2011)
(c) = ultimate tensile strength
(d) > the ultimate tensile strength y y
21. Consider the following statements : (ESE-2007)

1. In a beam, of rectangular cross section the
A. O x B. O x
maximum shear stress occurs at the neutral xis
of the beam cross-section.
2. The maximum shear stress in a beam of
circular cross-section is 50% more than the y y
average shear stress.
3. The maximum shear stress in a beam of
triangular cross-section, with its vertex C. O x D. O x
upwards occurs at b/6 above the neutral axis.
Which of these statements are correct ?
(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 2 and 3 only
(c) 1 and 2 only (d) 1 and 3 only
List- II
1. 2.
22. A symmetrical I-section is subjected to shear force.
The shear stress induced across the section is
maximum at which location ? (ESE-2008)
(a) Extreme fibers
(b) At the bottom of flanges in flanges
(c) At the bottom of flanges in web portion 3. 4.
(d) At the neutral axis
23. A timber beam is 100mm wide and 150mm deep.

The beam is simply supported and carries a central
Codes:
concentrated load W. If the maximum stress in shear
A B C D A B C D
is 2N/mm2, what would be the corresponding load
(a) 2 4 1 3 (b) 3 4 1 2
W on the beam? (ESE-2009)
(c) 2 1 4 3 (d) 3 1 4 2
(a) 20kN (b) 30kN
(c) 40kN (d) 25kN 26. A rectangular beam of width 100 mm is subjected to
a maximum shear force of 60 kN. The corresponding
24. Shear span is defined as the zone where maximum shear stress in the cross-section is 4 N/
(ESE-2010) mm2. The depth of the beam should be (ESE-2012)
(a) Bending moment is zero (a) 200 mm (b) 150 mm
(b) shear force is zero (c) 100 mm (d) 225 mm
217 Shear Stresses
27. Two planks each of 50 mm × 50 mm section are 2. The shear stress at the centre of a circular shaft
glued together along the length to form a section under twisting moment is zero.
50 mm × 100 mm; and used as a beam. If the shear 3. The shear stress at the extreme fibres of a circular
force at a section is 1000 N, what is the maximum shaft under twisting moment is maximum.
shear on the glue? (ESE-2015) Which of the above statements is/are correct?
(a) 0.15 MPa (b) 0.3 MPa (ESE-2017)
(c) 0.6 MPa (d) 2.4 MPa (a) 1,2 and 3 (b) 1 only (c) 2 and 3 (d) 3 only
28. A simply supported beam of length 4 m is subjected 33. In the case of a rectangular beam subjected to a
to a uniformly distributed load of 2 kN/m. What transverse shearing force, the ratio of maximum
is the maximum shear stress if the cross-section is shear stress to average shear stress is (ESE – 2018)
rectangular, 100 mm wide and 200 mm deep? (a) 0.75 (b) 1.00 (c) 1.25 (d) 1.50
(ESE-2015)
(a) 0.2 N/mm
2
(b) 0.1 N/mm2 34. A beam of triangular cross-section is subjected to a
(c) 0.4 N/mm2 (d) 0.3 N/mm2 shear force of 50 kN. The base width of the section
is 250 mm and the height is 200 mm. The beam is
29. What is the shear stress at the neutral axis in a beam placed with its base horizontal. The shear stress at
of isosceles triangular section with a base of 40 mm neutral axis will be nearly. (ESE-2019)
and height 20 mm subjected to shear force of 3 kN? (a) 2.2 N/mm
2
(b)2.7 N/mm2
(ESE-2015) (c) 3.2 N/mm
2
(d)3.7 N/mm2
(a) 3 MPa (b) 6 MPa
35. The maximum shear stress across a circular section
(c) 10 MPa (d) 20 MPa
is (ESE-2019)
(a) b 3 l Average shear stress
4
30. A beam of square cross-section is placed such that
its neutral axis coincides with its diagonal, and it
(b) b 2 l Average shear stress
3
is subjected to a shear force F. What is the ratio of
the maximum shear stress to the shear stress at the
(c) b 4 l Average shear stress
5
neutral axis? (ESE-2015)
(a) 9/8 (b) 8/9 (c) 7/8 (d) 8/7
(d) b 59 l Average shear stress
31. The intensity of u.d.l which, when it acts over the
36. A circular beam of 100 mm diameter is subjected to
entire span of 1 m of a cantilever beam of rectangular
a shear force of 30 kN. The maximum shear stress
cross-section of width 100 mm and depth 200 mm,
will be nearly. (ESE – 2020)
would produce a maximum shear stress of 1.5 N/
(a) 5.1 MPa (b) 6.3 MPa
mm2, is (ESE-2015)
(c) 7.5 MPa (d) 8.7 MPa
(a) 20 kN/m (b) 30 kN/m
(c) 26.6 kN/m (d) 36.6 kN/m
37. A simply supported wooden beam 100 mm wide,
250 mm deep and 3 m long is carrying a uniformly
distributed load of 40 kN/m. The maximum shear
1. The shear stress distribution across the section
stress will be (ESE – 2020)
of a circular shaft subjected to twisting varies
(a) 2.4 MPa (b) 2.8 MPa
parabolically.
(c) 3.2 MPa (d) 3.6 MPa
218 Solid Mechanics
04. Ans: (c)

KEY & Detailed Solutions Sol:
B B τmax
01.(c) 02.(c) 03. (a) 04. (c) 05. (c)
06. (a) 07. (d) 08. (a) 09. (b) 10. (c) 1D
τmax 8
11. (c) 12. (d) 13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (b) B B 3D
8
16. (c) 17. (b) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (a)
21. (d) 22. (d) 23. (a) 24. (c) 25. (c)
=
1 1= B
26. (d) 27. (b) 28. (d) 29. (c) 30. (a) 8D 8B 2 4 2

31. (a) 32. (c) 33. (d) 34. (b) 35. (a) Where,
36. (a) 37. (d) D = diagonal of the square = B 2
B = side of the square
01. Ans: (c)
Sol: 05. Ans: (c) P
Parabolic
Sol: A
B
L/3 L
P
L
M=P3
L
Slope at the support,

Shear stress b PL l]Lg 2
ML 3 = PL
θ B = 3EI = 3EI 9EI

02. Ans: (c)
Deflection at the free end, A
Pb 3 l
Sol: For a triangular section subjected to shear force, L 3
shear stress at neutral axis is θ A = θ B b 3 l + 3EI
L

τ NA = 3 6τ avg@ = 3 > 1 bh H
4 F = PL b L l + PL
2 3 3

4 4 = 4PL
9EI 3 3 EI 81EI
2

8 F
τ NA = 3bh 06. Ans: (a)
Sol: At the junction of flange and web, width increases
towards neutral axis therefore shear stress suddenly
03. Ans: (a) decreases. The appropriate option is (a).
Sol: Assertion is true: In resisting shear force circular
section is more efficient than rectangular. 07. Ans: (d)
Reason is also true: τ max = 1.33τ avg in circular Sol: Sudden increase in width
section, τ max = 1.5τ avg in rectangular section. Causes sudden decrease in shear stress. else where
Lesser shear stresses develop in circular section parabolic variation.
than a rectangular section.
08. Ans: (a)
Sol: Increase in width causes decreases in shear stress
(As shear stress is inversely proportional to width
of the beam).
Chapter 8 Torsion
01. Under torsion, brittle materials generally fail The effect of which can be neglected
(ESE -1992) Of these statements (ESE -1993)
(a) Along a plane perpendicular to its longitudinal (a) 1,2 and 3 are correct (b) 1 and 2 are correct
axis (c) 1 and 3 are correct (d) 2 and 3 are correct
(b) In the direction of minimum tension
06. Which of the following pairs are correctly matched?
(c) Along surface forming a 450 angle with the
1. Shear stress distribution diagram in a beam
longitudinal axis
varies for different shapes of sections
(d) Not in any specific manner
2. Bending stress distribution diagram in a beam
is similar for different shapes of section
02. A torsion member is fabricated from two concentric
3. Ratio of bending stress to shear stress in a
thin tubes. At the ends, the tubes are welded to rigid
shaft is M/2T
discs so that both the tubes are twisted as a unit.
4. Polar moment of inertia is used in torsion
The radius of the outer tube is 2r and that of the
inner tube is r. If the shear stresses developed in the
below. (ESE-1994)
outer tube is τ, then the shear stress developed in
(a) 1,2 and 3 (b) 1,3 and 4
the inner tube will be (ESE -1993)
(c) 1,2 and 4 (d) 2,3 and 4
(a) τ (b) 0.25τ (c) 0.75τ (d) 0.5τ
07. A bar AB, 4 cm in diameter and 4 m long is rigidly
03. A circular shaft subjected to torsion undergoes a fixed at is ends. A torque of 12000 kg cm is applied
twist of 10 in a length of 120 cm. If the maximum at section of the bar, one meter from end A. The
shear stress induced is limited to 1000 kg/cm2 and fixing couples TA and TB(in kg cm) at the supports A
if modulus of rigidity G = 0.8×106, then the radius and B will be respectively (ESE-1994)
of the shaft should be (ESE -1993) (a) 9000, 6000 (b) 3000, 9000
π π
(a) 18 (b) 27 (c) 6000, 9000 (d) 9000, 3000
18 27 08. A solid shaft of circular cross-section is subjected to

(c) π (d) π a torque T which produces a maximum shear stress
fs, in the shaft. The diameter of the shaft should be
04. In order to produce bending and shear stresses of (ESE-1995)
equal magnitudes at the extreme fibers of a circular
πf πf
cross-section under the action of combined bending (a) 16Ts (b) 3 16Ts
and torsion, the ratio bending to twisting moments
16T 16T
must be (ESE -1993) (c) πfs (d) 3 πfs
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.5 (c) 1 (d) 2
09. A shaft is subjected to a bending moment M and a
05. Consider the following statements: Torque T. The equivalent bending moment ‘Meq’ on
In pure torsion on a circular shaft the shaft is given by (ESE-1995)
1. Torsion M + M2 + T2 M+ M+T
(a) (b)
2. Axial 4 2
3. Bending moment, M − M2 + T2 M + M2 + T2
(c) 2 (d) 2
223 Torsion
10. A circular shaft is subjected to a twisting moment

2M T
T and bending moment M. The ratio of maximum (a) T (b) 2M
bending stress to maximum shear stress is given
2T M
by (ESE-1996) (c) M (d) 2T
2M M
(a) T (b) T
2T M If a solid circular shaft and a hollow circular shaft
(c) M (d) 2T
have the same torsional strength, then
1. The weight of the hollow shaft will be less
11. A section of a solid circular shaft with diameter D
than that of solid shaft.
is subjected to bending moment M and torque T.
2. the external diameter of the hollow shaft will
The expression for maximum principal stress at the
be greater than that of the solid shaft.
section is (ESE-1996)
2M + T 3. the stiffness of the hollow shaft will be equal to
(a)
πD3 that of the solid shaft. (ESE-1998)
16π 7 + (a) 1, 2 and 3 are correct (b) 2 and 3 are correct
(b) M M2 + T2A
D3 (c) 3 alone is correct (d) 1 and 2 are correct
16 6 2 + 2@
(c) M T 16. A shaft turns at 150 rpm under a torque of
πD3
1500 Nm. Power transmitted is (ESE-1999)
16 7 +
(d) M M2 + T2A (a) 15π kW (b) 10πkW
πD3
(c) 7.5 πkW (d) 5π kW
12. If the diameter of a shaft subjected to torque alone
17. A hollow steel shaft of external diameter 100 mm
is doubled, then the horse power P can be increased
and internal diameter 50 mm is to be replaced by a
to (ESE-1997)
solid alloy shaft. Assuming the same value of polar
(a) 16 P (b) 8 P (c) 4P (d) 2P
modulus for both, the diameter of the solid alloy
13. As per the maximum principal stress theory. When shaft will be (ESE-1999)
a shaft is subjected to a bending moment M and (a) 10 # 3
9375 mm (b) 10 # 2
9375 mm
torque T. And σ is the allowable stress in axial
b 9375 l mm (d)
3
(c) 10 # 3
9375 mm
tension, then the diameter d of the shaft is given by 10
(ESE-1997)
18. A shaft of diameter ‘d’ is subjected to bending
(a) d = πσ 7M + M + T A
3 16 2 2
moment M and twisting moment T. The developed
principal stress will be (ESE-1999)
(b) d3 = πσ 7M + M2 + T2A
4
16 ^
M ! M2 + T2 h
16
(a) ! 3 M2 + T2 (b)
πd πd3
(c) d3 = πσ 7M + M2 + T2A
32
16 ^
3 T ! M + T h (d)
16 ^
(c) 2 2
M2 + T2 ! Mh
πd πd3
(d) d3 = πσ 7M + M2 + T2A
8
19. Assertion (A): The shear stress ‘q’ at a point on the
14. If a circular shaft is subjected to a torque T and a section having coordinate (0, y) if (fsy/R).
bending moment M, the ratio of the maximum Reason (R): In the shaft, the shear stress ‘q’at a
shear stress to the maximum bending stress is given point of coordinate (x, y) is (fs/R) x2 + y2
by (ESE-1997) (ESE-2000)
224 Solid Mechanics
Codes: 24. A bar AB diameter 40 mm and 4 m long is rigidly

(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct fixed at its ends. A torque of 600 Nm is applied at a
explanation of A section of the bar, 1 m from end A. The fixing couples
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not a correct TA and TB at the supports A and B, respectively, are
explanation of A (ESE-2001)
(c) A is true but R is false (a) 450 N-m and 150 N-m
(d) A is false but R is true (b) 200 N-m and 400 N-m
(c) 300 N-m and 150 N-m
20. A solid shaft of 100 mm diameter in a small hydraulic (d) 300 N-m and 100 N-m
turbine is subjected to an axial compressive load of
100 π kN and a torque of 5 π kNm. The maximum 25. If a shaft is simultaneously subjected to a torque T
shearing stress induced in the shaft is (ESE-2000) and a bending moment M, the ratio of maximum
(a) 20 3 N/mm2 (b) 20 8 N/mm2 bending stress and maximum shearing stress is
given by (ESE-2001)
(c) 20 15 N/mm2 (d) 20 17 N/mm2
2M M 2T T
(a) T (b) T (c) M (d) M
21. A solid circular shaft is subjected to a torque ‘T’

Nm, which produces a maximum shear stress of fs
26. Assertion (A): The failure surface of a mild steel
N/mm2 in the shaft. The required diameter of the
torsion specimen subjected to a torque about its axis
shaft would be (ESE-2000)
is along a surface perpendicular to its axis.
(a) 10 b πf l (b) 10 b 16Ts l
16T 1/3 πf 1/3 Reason (R): Mild steel is relatively weaker in shear
s
than in tension and the plane of maximum shear is
(c) 10 b πf l (d) 10 b 16Ts l
16T 1/2 πf 1/2 perpendicular to its axis. (ESE-2001)
s
27. The ratio of the torsional moments of resistance of

a solid circular shaft of diameter D, and a hollow
22. A solid shaft has diameter 80 mm. It is subjected
circular shaft having external diameter D and
to a torque of 4 kNm. The maximum shear stress
internal diameter d is given by (ESE-2002)
induced in the shaft would be (ESE-2001)

(a) b 75 l
π N/mm
2
(b) b 250 l
π N/mm
2 D4
(a) 4 4 (b)
D4 − d4
D −d D4
(c) b 125 l
π N/mm
2
(d) b 150 l
π N/mm
2
(c)
D3 − d3 D3
(d) 3 3
D 3
D −d

23. Two steel shafts ‘A’ and ‘B’ are used for 28. Match List –I with List-II and select the correct
transmitting power. The ratio of revolutions of answer using the codes given below the lists:
shafts i.e., (NA/NB)=2. The ratio of torques on (ESE-2002)
shafts i.e., (TA/TB)=0.5. The ratio of the horse power List-I
transmitted by the shafts i.e., (PA/PB) would be A. Torque-twist relationship for a circular shaft
(ESE-2001) B. Strain energy of elastic torsion
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.25 (c) 1 (d) 2 C. Circumferential shear stress
D. Maximum shearing stress due to combined
torsion and direct stress
225 Torsion
List – II 33. A bar of circular cross-section of diameter D is

subjected to a torque T at B as shown in the figure
1 ]Grθg
1. + 2 (ESE-2005)
2 σ 4τ 2. given below.
2
L
]GJg T
3. b 2L l θ2 4. b L l θ
GJ
D C
. Codes: A B
A B C D A B C D L/2 L/2
(a) 2 3 4 1 (b) 4 1 2 3 What is the angle of twist at A ?
(c) 2 1 4 3 (d) 4 3 2 1 (a) Same as that at B (b) Zero
(c) Twice as that at B (d) Half as that at B
29. A solid circular shaft, ABC, has a total length
of ‘3a’. A gear wheel positioned at B, at distance 34. The failure surface of a standard cast iron torsion
‘a’ from the left hand end A, exerts a torque T. If specimen, subjected to a torque is along
the ends A and C are instantaneously locked in (ESE-2006)
position by brakes just before the torque is applied, (a) the surface helicoidal at 45 to the axis of the
0
the torsional moments induced in both segments T1 specimen.

(AB) and T2 (BC) are in the ratio. (ESE-2002) (b) the curved surface at the grips
(a) 3:1 (b) 2:3 (c) 1:2 (d) 2:1 (c) the plane surface perpendicular to the axis of
the specimen.
30. Two shafts having same length and material are (d) the curved surface perpendicular to the axis of
joined are joined in series and subjected to a torque the specimen
of 10 kNm. If the ratio of their diameters is 2:1, then
the ratio of their angles of twist is (ESE-2002) 35. For the circular shaft AB, as shown in the figure
(a) 16:1 (b) 2:1 (c) 1:2 (d) 1:16 below, a torque ‘T’ is applied at the section XX
at C, such that b/a = 1.5. The shaft is uniform in
31. A solid circular shaft of diameter d is subjected to section. (ESE-2006)
a twisting moment T. The maximum shear stress in
X
the shaft is proportional to (ESE-2003) a b
(a) d
2
(b) d (c) 1/d (d) 1/d3
2
TA T TB
32. When a cantilever shaft of brittle material is
subjected to a clockwise twisting moment at the
A C
free and, the possible crack propagation will be B
(ESE-2003) X
(a) 45 clockwise with respect to the axis of shaft
0
(b) 450 anticlockwise with respect to the axis of

T
What is the ratio of TA ?
shaft (a) 2 (b) 1.5
B
(c) 0.67 (d) 0.5
(c) Perpendicular to the axis
(d) Parallel to the axis 36. A circular shaft of diameter 30mm having shear
modulus G = 80GPa is subjected to moment as
shown below. (ESE-2007)
226 Solid Mechanics
20kN-m 41. Torsion applied to a circular shaft results in a twist

of 10 over a length of 1m. The maximum shear stress
A induced is 120N/mm2 and the modulus of rigidity
C
of the shaft material is 0.8 × 105 N/mm2. What is the
B
radius of the shaft? (ESE-2009)
2m 1m

300 180
What is the maximum shear stresses developed at (a) π (b) π
periphery of shaft at A?
90 270
(a) 20.6 MPa (b) 15.3 MPa (c) π (d) π
(c) 7.4 MPa (d) Zero
42. A solid shaft rotating at 180 rpm is subjected to
37. Two shafts, one of solid section and the other of a mean torque of 5000 N-m. What is the power
hollow section, of same material and weight having transmitted by the shaft in kW? (ESE-2010)
same length are subjected to equal torsional force. (a) 25 π (b) 20π (c) 60 π (d) 30 π
What is the torsional stiffness of hollow shaft ?
(ESE-2007) 43. A solid shaft has length and diameter ‘Ls’ and D
(a) Equal to that of the solid shaft respectively. A hollow shaft of length Lh. external
(b) Less than that of the solid shaft diameter D, and internal diameter ‘d’ respectively.
(c) More than that of the solid shaft Both are of the same material. The ratio of torsional
(d) Exactly half of that of the solid shaft stiffness of hollow shaft to that of solid shaft is
(ESE-2010)
38. A beam is made of two identical metal flats soldered
together. What is the ratio of stiffness of this beam (a) ;1 + b D
d l4E L s
Lh (b) ;1 − b D
d l4E L h
Ls
to the stiffness of a beam in which the two flats are
(c) ;1 − b D
d l4E L s (d) ;1 − b D lE s
4
L
not soldered and which acts independently? Lh d Lh
(ESE-2008)
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 6 (d) 8 44. A circular shaft which has a diameter of 100 mm is
subjected to a torque of 5 kN-m. The shear stress,
39. A circular shaft is subjected to a bending moment in N/mm2, induced in the shaft would be (ESE-
Mb and a twisting moment Mt. What is the ratio of 2010)
160 120
maximum shear stress and the maximum bending (a) π (b) π
stress? (ESE-2008)
2M t Mt 125 80
(a) M (b) M (c) π (d) π
b b
M 1.5M
(c) 2Mt (d) M t 45. A solid circular shaft subjected to a torque T produces
b b
maximum shear stress fs, which is the maximum
40. A 40mm diameter shaft is subjected to a twisting principal value in the material. The corresponding
moment Mt. If shear stress developed in shaft is 5N/ diameter of the shaft should be (ESE-2010)
mm2, what is the value of the twisting moment?
3 π.fs 3 32.T
(ESE-2009) (a) 16.T (b) π.fs
(a) 628.8 N-m (b) 328.4 N-m
3 π 3 16.T
(c) 62.8 N-m (d) 30.4 N-m (c) 16.Tfs (d) π.fs
227 Torsion
46. Assertion (A): A hollow circular shaft has more 52. The polar modulus of a circular shaft of diameter d
power transmitting capacity than a solid shaft same is (ESE-2012)
π π
material and same weight per unit length. (a) 16 d3 (b) 32 d3
Reason (R): In a circular shaft, shear stress
π π
developed at a point due to torsion is proportional (c) 64 d3 (d) 32 d2
to its radial distance from the centre of the shaft.
(ESE-2010) 53. If a shaft rotates at 100 r.p.m. and is subjected to a
47. If A = Cross-sectional area torque of 3000 N-m, the power transmitted in kW
E = Young’s modulus of elasticity would be (ESE-2012)
G = Modulus of rigidity (a) 30π (b) 15 π
I = Moment of inertia (c) 20π (d) 10π
J = Polar moment of inertia
Then torsional rigidity is given by (ESE-2012) 54. A bar AB of diameter 40 mm and 4 m long is rigidly
(a) AE (b) GE (c) EI (d) GJ fixed at its ends. A torque 600 N-m is applied at a
section of the bar, 1 m from end A. The fixing couples
48. The polar moment of inertia of the cross-section of
TA and TB at the supports A and B, respectively are
the member is required to assess the strength of the
(ESE-2012)
member in (ESE-2012)
(a) 200 N-m and 400 N-m
(a) bending (b) torsion
(b) 300 N-m and 150 N-m
(c) axial force (d) shear
(c) 450 N-m and 150 N-m
(d) 300 N-m and 100 N-m
49. In a circular shaft of diameter d, subjected to a
torque T, the maximum shear stress induced is 55. A solid shaft of circular cross-section is subjected to
(ESE-2012) torque T which produces a maximum shear stress τ
(a) proportional to d3 in the shaft. The diameter of the shaft will be
(b) proportional to d4 (ESE-2012)
3 16T πτ
(c) inversely proportional to d3 (a) πτ (b) 16T
(d) inversely proportional to d4
3
πτ 16T
(c) 16T (d) πτ
50. Which of the following terms represents the torque
corresponding to a twist of one radian in a shaft over 56. The ratio of torsional moments of resistance of a solid
its unit length? (ESE-2012) circular shaft of diameter D to that of a hollow shaft
(a) Torsional stress (b) Torsional rigidity with external diameter D and internal diameter d is
(c) Flexural rigidity (d) Moment of resistance (ESE-2012)
D4 D4 − d4
(a) 4 4 (b)
51. If a shaft is turning at N r.p.m and the mean torque D −d D4
to which the shaft is subjected is T N-m, the power D3 D3 − d3
(c) 3 3 (d)
transmitted by the shaft in kN-m/s (ESE-2012) D −d D3

Both the shafts are of the same material.
2πNT 2πNT
(a) 45000 (b) 60000
2πNT 2πNT 57. Which of the following terms represents the torque
(c) 30000 (d) 33000 that produces a twist of one radian in a shaft of unit
length? (ESE-2013)
228 Solid Mechanics
(a) Torsional stress (b) Torsional rigidity (a) Proportional to D3

(c) Flexural rigidity (d) Moment of resistance (b) Proportional to D4
(c) inversely proportional to D3
58. A 60 mm dia. Shaft is subjected to a torque of (d) inversely proportional to D4
6 kN-m. C = 8×104 N/mm2.
The maximum shear stress induced in the shaft in 63. A hollow shaft of 16 mm outside diameter and 12
N/mm2 will be (ESE-2013) mm inside diameter is subjected to torque of 40

8000 4000 N-m. The shear stresses at the outside and inside of
(a) 9π (b) 9π
the material of the shaft are respectively.
12000 16000 (ESE – 2014)
(c) 9π (d) 9π (a) 62.75 N/mm2 and 50.00 N/mm2
(b) 72.75 N/mm2 and 54.54 N/mm2
59. A stepped circular shaft is fixed at A and C as shown
(c) 79.75 N/mm2 and 59.54 N/mm2
in the above figure. The diameter of the s h a f t
(d) 80.00 N/mm2 and 40.00 N/mm2
along BC is twice that of as along AB. The torsional
rigidity of AB is GJ. The torque required for unit 64. A solid shaft transmits 150 kW at a shear stress of
twist at B is (ESE-2013) 70 MPa running at a frequency of 3 Hz. What will
be the shear stress when the frequency is 1.5 Hz?
B C
A (ESE – 2015)
T (a) 35 MPa (b) 50 MPa
(c) 57 MPa (d) 140 MPa
l l 65. A circular shaft of diameter ‘D’ is made of a material

for which Young’s Modulus of Elasticity is ‘E’ and
2GJ 5GJ Poission’s Ration is ‘v’. The ratio of flexural rigidity
(a) , (b) ,
to torsional rigidity for the shaft is (ESE – 2015)
9GJ 17GJ (a) 4 (1 +v) (b) 1.5 (1 – 2v)
(c) , (d) ,
(c) (1 + v) (d) 0.25 ( 1 + v)
60. A solid shaft of 80 mm diameter is transmitting 100
kW of power at 200 r.p.m. The maximum shear 66. What is the diameter d of a solid circular shaft
stress induced in the shaft will nearly be when subjected to a torque T with a corresponding
(ESE – 2014) maximum shear stress of magnitude fs?
(a) 60 N/mm2 (b) 56 N/mm2 (ESE – 2015)
16T πfs
(c) 52 N/mm2 (d) 48 N/mm2 (a) πf (b) 16T
s
61. The power transmitted by a 75 mm diameter shaft (c)

16T 16T
πfs (d) 3 πfs
at 140 r.p.m., subjected to a maximum shear stress
of 60 N/mm2, is nearly (ESE – 2014) 67. A metal shaft of solid circular section rotates at 160
(a) 68 kW (b) 70 kW rpm and is subjected to a torque of 1500 Nm. What
(c) 73 kW (d) 76 kW is the power, in kW transmitted by the shaft?
62. A circular shaft of diameter D is subjected to a (ESE – 2015)
torque T. The maximum shear stress of the shaft (a) 32 π (b) 16 π (c) 12 π (d) 8 π
229 Torsion
68. What is the power transmitted by a 100 mm 74. A hollow steel shaft has outside diameter d and
d
diameter solid shaft at 150 rpm without exceeding a inside diameter 2 . The value of d for the shaft, if
maximum stress of 60 N/mm2? (ESE – 2015) it has to transmit 200 hp at 105 rpm with a working
Take π2 = 10 shear stress of 420 kg/cm2, is (ESE – 2016)
(a) 187. 5 kW (b) 18.75 kW (a) 5.6 cm (b) 2.6 cm
(c) 1.875 kW (d) 1875 kW (c) 12.1 cm (d) 15.5 cm
69. What is the Polar Modulus of a solid circular metal 75. Two thin-walled tubular members made of the same
shaft of diameter 8 cm? (ESE – 2015) material have the same length, same wall thickness
(a) 64 π cm
3
(b) 32 π cm3 and same total weight and both subjected to the
(c) 16 π cm3 (d) 8 π cm3 same torque of magnitude T. If the individual cross-
sections are circular and square, respectively, as
70. A hollow circular shaft has the diameters 50 cm and in the figures, then the ratios of the shear stress τ,
30 cm and is subjected to a torque. If the realized reckoned for the circular member in relation to the
maximum shear stress is 30 N/mm2, what is the square member will be (ESE – 2016)
applied torque to nearest units? (ESE – 2015) t
(a) 160 N-m (b) 320 N-m
(c) 80 N-m (d) 640 N-m
71. A circular shaft rotates at 200 rpm and is subjected

to a torque of 1500 Nm. The power transmitted
would be (ESE – 2016) Figures not to scale A′′0
A′0
(a)10 π kW (b) 15 π kW
(c) 20 π kW (d) 30 π kW (a) 0.785 (b) 0.905
(c) 0.616 (d) 0.513
72. Torques are transmitted to the solid circular shaft
as shown in the figure below. If the corresponding 76. Statement (I): The failure of a mild steel specimen
permissible stress in the shaft is 60 N/mm2, the of circular cross-section, subjected to a torque
diameter of the shaft is nearly. (ESE – 2016) occurs along its cross-section.
2m Statement (II): The failure occurs on a plane of the
900 N-m 2150N-m
specimen subjected to maximum shear stress; and
A B C D mild steel is relatively weak in shear.(ESE – 2016)
450 N-m 800 N-m 77. Statement (I): Hollow shafts are preferred in
2m 2m propeller shafts of airplanes.
(a) 57.3 mm (b) 47.5 mm Statement (II): Use of hollow shafts affords
(c) 37.3 mm (d) 27.3 mm considerable reduction in the weight of the shaft for
equal performance. (ESE-2017)
73. A solid circular shaft has a diameter d. Polar Codes:
modulus will be (ESE – 2016) (a) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are
π 2 π 3
(a) 16 d (b) 64 d individually true and Statement (II) is the
correct explanation of Statement (I)
π π
(c) 16 d3 (d) 32 d2 (b) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are
230 Solid Mechanics
individually true but statement (II) is not the (a) 100 kW (b) 120 kW
correct explanation of statement (I) (c) 140 kW (d) 160 kW
(c) Statement (I) is true but Statement (II) is false
(d) Statement (I) is false but Statement (II) is true
78. A solid shaft A of diameter D and length L is 01.(c) 02.(d) 03.(d) 04.(b) 05. (d)
subjected to a torque T; another shaft B of the 06.(c) 07.(d) 08. (d) 09.(d) 10.(a)
same material and of the same length, but half the 11. (d) 12. (b) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (a)
diameter, is also subjected to the same torque T. The 16. (c) 17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (d)
ratio between the angles of twist of shaft B to that of 21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (a) 25. (a)
shaft A is (ESE – 2018)
26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (d) 29. (d) 30. (d)
(a) 32 (b) 16 (c) 8 (d) 4
31. (d) 32. (a) 33. (a) 34. (a) 35. (b)
79. The required diameter for a solid shaft to transmit 36. (d) 37. (c) 38. (b) 39. (c) 40. (c)
400 kW at 150 rpm, with the working shear stress 41. (d) 42. (d) 43. (c) 44. (d) 45. (d)
not to exceed 80 MN/m2, is nearly (ESE – 2018) 46. (a) 47. (d) 48. (b) 49. (c) 50. (b)
(a) 125 mm (b) 121 mm 51. (b) 52. (a) 53. (d) 54. (c) 55. (a)
(c) 117 mm (d) 113 mm 56. (a) 57. (b) 58. (b) 59. (d) 60. (d)
61. (c) 62. (c) 63. (b) 64.(d) 65.(c)
80. Which one of the following statements is correct for
66.(d) 67.(d) 68.(a) 69. (b) 70. (d)
the rotating shafts transmitting power? (ESE-2019)
(a) Lower the frequency of shaft, lower will be the 71. (a) 72. (b) 73. (c) 74. (c) 75. (a)
torque 76. (a) 77. (a) 78. (b) 79. (c) 80. (b)
(b) Higher the frequency of shaft, lower will be 81. (c) 82. (b)
the torque
(c) Frequency of the shaft, does not influence the 01. Ans: (c)
torque Sol: In brittle material subjected to torsion, diagonal
(d) Higher the frequency of shaft, higher will be tension occurs at 45o to axis, which causes failure
the torque along compression diagonal .
81. The maximum shear stress induced in a solid 450

circular shaft of diameter 15 cm, when the shaft 45
transmits 150 kW power at 180 rpm, will be
(ESE-2019) Crack450 to axis
(a) 16 N/mm
2
(b) 14 N/mm2
02. Ans: (d)
(c) 12 N/mm
2
(d)10 N/mm2
Sol: Given τinner = τ

82. A hollow shaft of external and internal diameters τ inner = R inner = r = 1
τ outer R outer 2r 2
as 100 mm and 40 mm respectively is transmitting
power at 120 rpm. If the shearing stress is not to
τinner = 0.5 (τ)
exceed 50 MPa, the power the shaft can transmit
Chapter 9 Springs
01. When a closely coiled helical spring is subjected to

an axial load, the deflection of the spring is directly
proportional to (ESE -1992)
(a) Modulus of rigidity of the spring material
(b) Diameter of spring wire
(c) Mean diameter of the spring a a
(d) Number of turns of the spring
W W

1 1 1
02. In a close-coiled helical spring subjected to an axial (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 4 (d) 8
load other quantities remaining the same, if the wire
diameter is doubled, then the stiffness to the spring 06. The close-coiled spring shown in figure-I is cut
when compared to the original on will become into two equal prices which are combined to form
(ESE-1994) a parallel spring as shown in figure-II. The ratio of
(a) twice (b) four times the angular twist for the spring in figure-II to that of
(c) eight times (d) sixteen times spring in figure-I due to an axial load P is
(ESE-1999)
03. If two springs of stiffnesses K1 and K2 are connected
in series, the stiffnesses of the combined spring is
(ESE-1995) K/2 K K

K1 K 2 K +K
(a) + (b) K1 K 2
K1 K 2 1 2
a a
(c) K1+K2 (d) K1K2 P P
Figure-II
Figure-I

04. Two closed-coil springs of stiffnesses K and 2K 1
(a) 2 (b) 4
1
(c) 8
1
(d) 1
are arranged in series in one case and in parallel
in the other case. The ratio of stiffnesses of springs
07. If three close-coiled and two open –coiled helical
connected in series to parallel is (ESE-1996)
springs, each having the stiffness k are connected in
1 1 2 2 series then the overall stiffness is (ESE-2001)
(a) 3 (b) 9 (c) 3 (d) 9
(b) b 5 l (c) d n (d) b 6k l
k k
(a) 5 k
05. A close-coiled helical spring shown below in figure 5 5
–I is to be cut into two equal pieces and combined as
08. Two co-axial springs are subjected to a force
a parallel spring as shown in figure-II The ratio of
1 kN. Spring constant of larger diameter spring is 80
the maximum angular twist of the situation shown
N/mm and that of smaller diameter spring is 120
in figure-II to that of figure-I due to the same load
N/mm. The deformation is the spring combination
W will be (ESE-1998)
will be equal to (ESE-2003)

125 135
(a) 5 mm (b) 15 mm (c) 6 mm (d) 7 mm
243 Springs
09. What is the equivalent spring stiffness for the 12. A close helical spring of 100 mm mean diameter is
system of springs shown in the figure given below? made of 10 mm diameter rod, and has 20 turns. The
(ESE-2005) spring carries can axial load of 200 kN with G = 8.4
×104 N/mm2. The stiffness of the spring is nearly
(ESE – 2014)
10kN/m (a) 5.25 N/mm (b) 6.50 N/mm
30 kN/m (c) 7.25 N/mm (d) 8.50 N/mm
20kN/m
40kN/m
13. For the structure shown in the figure, all of I, EI
and L are of respective unit values. The equivalent
stiffness constant for the structure is (ESE – 2015)
10kN
1m 1m I,EI
m
(a) 43 kN/m (b) 50 kN/m A B
(c) 58 kN/m (d) 64 kN/m
K=3
10. A close-coiled helical spring with n coils, mean
radius R and diameter ‘d’ is subjected to an axial C D
load W. What is the compression in spring?
(ESE-2007) L
64WR3 n 64WR3 n (a) 1 (b) 1.5 (c) 4.5 (d) 9
(a) (b)
Cd3 Cd 4
32WR3 n 32WR3 n 14. Two closely coiled helical springs A and B are equal
(c) (d) in all respects but for the number of turns, with A
Cd3 Cd 4
having just half the number of turns of that of B.
11. The equivalent spring constant for the set up shown What is the ratio of deflections in terms of spring A
in the above figure, where EI = unity throughout, is to spring B? (ESE – 2015)
(ESE-2013) (a) 1/ 8 (b) 1/4 (c) 1/2 (d) 2/1
A 1unit 1unit B
15. A closely coiled helical spring of round steel wire 5
mm in diameter having 12 complete coils of 50 mm
mean diameter is subjected to an axial load of 100
N. Modulus of Rigidity of the spring is 80 kN/mm2
K=48 units
What is the deflection of the spring? (ESE – 2015)
(a) 12 mm (b) 24 mm
(c) 36 mm (d) 48 mm
0.5 0.5
16. A uniform T-shaped arm of weight W, pinned about
a horizontal point C, is supported by a vertical
(a) 30 units (b) 36 units spring of stiffness K. The extension of the spring is
(c) 40 units (d) 48 units (ESE-2017)
244 Solid Mechanics

K 01.(d) 02.(d) 03.(a) 04.(d) 05.(c)
L/2
A B 06.(b) 07.(b) 08.(a) 09. (c) 10. (b)
C
11. (a) 12. (a) 13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (b)
L/2 L L 16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (b) 19. (d)
01. Ans: (d)

3W 4W 3K 4K Sol: Deflection of closely coiled spring
(a) 4K (b) 3K (c) 4W (d) 3W
64R3 Wn
17. A closely coiled helical spring made of 10 mm δ= ∴d∝n
Gd 4
diameter steel wire has 15 coils of 100 mm mean
diameter. The spring is subjected to an axial load of
100 N. For a modulus of rigidity of 8.16 × 104 N/ 02. Ans: (d)
mm2, the stiffness of the spring will be nearly Gd 4
Sol: K =
(ESE-2019) 64R3 n
(a) 5.9 N/mm (b) 6.8 N/mm K ∝ d4
(c) 7.7 N/mm (d) 8.8 N/mm If d is doubled then k becomes
(2d)4 = 16 d4.
18. The deflection δ of the closed coil helical spring is
(ESE – 2020) 03. Ans: (a)
WR2 n 64WR3 n
(a) (b) Sol: For springs in series: effective stiffness is
8Cd3 Cd 4

128WR3 n 64WR2 n 1 = 1 + 1
(c) (d)
Cd2 Cd2 K e K1 K 2

K1 K 2
Where: There fore, K e =
K1 + K 2
W is the axial load
R is the radius of the coil
n is the number of turns of coil 04. Ans: (d)
C is the modulus of rigidity Sol:
d is the diameter of the wire of the coil For series
19. A closely-coiled helical spring of round steel wire K

5 mm in diameter having 12 complete coils of 50
mm mean diameter is subjected to an axial load
of 100 N. If modulus of rigidity is 80 GPa, the 2K
deflection of the spring will be (ESE – 2020)
(a) 36 mm (b) 32 mm
(c) 28 mm (d) 24 mm
]2Kg]Kg 2K2 2
Ke = = = K
2K + K 3K 3
245 Springs
For Parallel

W
Ke = δ
K 2K W 1 # 1000
δ = k = 200 = 5 mm
e
KP = K + 2K = 3K 09. Ans: (c)

Ks 2=1 2 Sol: For middle part of the springs which are in series
= 3#3 9 1 = 1 + 1
K p
K 10 40
K = 8kN/m
05. Ans: (c)
y Now all the springs are in parallel.
Sol: Angular twist θ = R
Ke = 20 + 8 +30 = 58 kN/m
Where y = deflection at the free end of the spring
R= mean coil radius of the spring 10. Ans: (b)
64WR3 n
64πWR2 n = 64WRL Sol: Deflection in spring, δ =
θ= Cd 4
4
πd G 4
πd G
11. Ans: (a)
(Where equivalent length of spring wire is, Sol:
P EI=const
bWl bLl
L = 2πRn)
θ2 = W2 L2 = 2 2 =1 1 E 1
θ1 W1 . L1 W . L 4 B
R
06. Ans: (b)
Sol: (Ke)1 = K
(Ke)2 = 2 K+2 K = 4 K
1
Angular twist θ∝ K
R
θ ]K eg C 0.5 0.5 D
θ1 ]K eg2 4K 4
= = = K 1
2 1

07. Ans: (b) Beam CD and the spring are in series
Sol: for springs connected in series ∴ For beam CD (for central load
1 = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 5
W,3
Ke K K K K K δ = 48EI
W 48EI = 48 ]1 g =
K
Ke = 5
K CD = δ = 48
L3 13
08. Ans: (a) 1 = 1 + 1 = 1 + 1

Sol: co-axial springs are in parallel arrangement K eff K spring K CD 48 48
equivalent stiffness, Ke = K1 + K2 ]48g]48g
K eff = = 24
= 80 + 120 = 200 N/mm
48 + 48
246 Solid Mechanics
Beam AB and remaining part (beam CD & the 14. Ans: (c)
spring) are parallel
W,3 Sol: δ∝ N
For beam AB (For central load) δ = 48EI
δ A = ]N/2g = 1
W 48EI = 48 ]1 g = δB N 2
K AB = δ = 6
L3 23

∴ Ktotal = KAB+ KEff = 6 + 24 = 30 units 15. Ans: (b)
64WR3 n
12. Ans: (a) Sol: δ =
Gd 4
Gd 4
Sol: The stiffness of spring = # 100 # 253 # 12
64R3 n =
64
= 24 mm
d = diameter of rod 80 # 103 # 5 4
R = radius of helical spring
G = 8.4 ×104 N/mm2
16. Ans: (b)
= 100
R =2 50 mm Sol:
Number of turn: n = 20 K
L/2
8.4 # 10 4 # ]10g4
L L
A B
64 # ]50g3 # 20
K= C
4
L/2 x= 3L
K = 5.25 N/mm
W1 W
2w1
13. Ans: (c)

Assume weight of vertical member is W1 also
Sol: 3EI =3
,3 weight of horizontal member is 2W1.
m Given that weight of total composite bar is W
A B Taking moments of weights about C
W1 ]2Lg + 2W1 ]Lg = 4

K=3 x= 3L
W1 + 2W1

C D 4
Total weight of composite bar acts at x = 3 L
3EI =3 from C
,3
∑MC = 0 (on FBD of composite bar)
Series:
F ]Lg = W b 3 L l
The spring BD and beam CD are in series 4

If equivalent stiffness
]3 g]3 g 3
4
F= 3W
K e = + = 2 = 1.5
1
3 3
F 4W
δ= K = 3 K
Now beam AB and (Beam CD and the spring
BD) are in parallel
∴ Total equivalent stiffness Ke = 3 + 1.5
= 4.5
247 Springs
17. Ans: (b) 19. Ans: (d)

Sol: d = 10 mm Sol: d = 5 mm
n = 15 n = 12
50
R = 50 mm R= 2 = 25 mm
P = 100 N
G = 8.16 × 104 N/mm2 P = 100 N
K=? G = 80 × 103 N/mm2

Gd 4 64WR3 n
Stiffness of spring, K = 3 δ=
64R n Gd 4
] # 4g]10 4g
= 8.16 103 64 ^100h^25h ^12h
3
^80 # 103 h^5 h4

=
64 # 50 # 15

K = 6.8 N/mm = 24 mm
18. Ans: (b)

64WR3 n
Sol: Deflection at the free end of a spring is δ =
Cd 4
Chapter 10 Thin & Thick Cylinders
01. Assertion (A): In cylindrical shells with Reason (R): The area of section of a cylinder by a
hemispherical ends, the hemispherical ends are longitudinal plane is inversely proportional to the
thicker than the cylindrical section. chord length of the end section. (ESE -1994)
Reason (R): The value of Poisson’s ratio for most
metals is 0.3. (ESE -1992) 06. A thick cylindrical pressure vessel of inner diameter
Codes: D1 and outer diameter D0 is subjected to an internal
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct fluid pressure of intensity p. The variation of the
explanation of A circumferential tensile stress py in the thickness of
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not a correct the shell will be (ESE-1995)
explanation of A PY straight line P
(a) (b) y

02. A thin cylindrical shell of diameter d, length l and

thickness t is subjected to an internal pressure p. (c) (d)
Py
The ratio of longitudinal strain to hoop strain is Py
(ESE -1992)
(b) 2t :1 − m D
pd pd 1
(a) 2t
m−2 2m − 1
(c) (d)
2m − 1 m−2 07. A thin cylindrical steel pressure vessel of diameter
03. A cold drawn seamless steel tubing subject to 6 cm and wall thickness 3 mm is subjected to an
internal pressure, has a diameter of 6 cm and wall internal fluid pressure of intensity p. If the ultimate
thickness of 0.2 cm. The ultimate strength of steel strength of steel is 3600 kg/cm2, the bursting
is 3600 kg/cm2. The bursting pressure (kg/cm2) is pressure will be (ESE-1995)
(ESE -1993) (a) 18 kg/cm
2
(b) 36 kg/cm2
(a) 120 (b) 240 (c) 480 (d) 960 (c) 180 kg/cm2 (d) 360 kg/cm2
08. Which one of the following pairs is not correctly

04. In a thin long closed cylindrical container, the fluid
matched? (ESE-1996)
pressure induces (ESE-1994)
(a) Lame’s constants : Thick cylinder
(a) only hoop stress
(b) Macaulay’s method: Deflection of beams
(b) only longitudinal stress
(c) Euler’s method: Theory of columns
(c) longitudinal stress equal to twice the hoop
(d) Eddy’s theorem : Torsion of shafts
stress
(d) longitudinal stress equal to half the hoop stress 09. Two closed thin vessels, one cylindrical and the
other spherical with equal internal diameter and
05. Assertion (A): In the case of a cylindrical structure wall thickness are subjected to equal internal fluid
carrying water under pressure, the maximum hoop pressure. The ratio of hoop stresses in the cylindrical
stress is on a longitudinal plane through the centre to that of spherical vessels is (ESE-1996)
of its cross-section. (a) 4.0 (b) 2.0 (c) 1.0 (d) 0.5
249 Thin & Thick Cylinders
10. A thin cylindrical shell of internal diameter D and 15. The variation of the hoop stress across the thickness
thickness t is subjected to internal pressure P. The of a thick cylinder is (ESE-2002)
change in diameter is given by (ESE-1997) (a) linear (b) uniform
PD2 _ 2 − µ i PD2 _1 − 2µ i
(c) parabolic (d) hyperobolic
(a) 4tE (b) 4tE
16. A thin cylindrical tube with closed ends is subjected
PD2 _1 − 2µ i PD2 _ 2 − µ i
to (ESE-2003)
(c) 2tE (d) 2tE 1. Longitudinal stress σ1 = 14 N/mm2
2. Hoop stress σ2 = 2 N/mm2
11. A cast iron pipe of 1 m diameter is required to 3. Shearing stress t = 8 N/mm2
withstand a 200 m head of water. If the limiting Then the maximum shearing stress is
tensile stress of the pipe material is 20 MPa, then (a) 14 N/mm2 (b) 12 N/mm2
the thickness of the pipe will be (ESE-1998) (c) 10 N/mm2 (d) 8 N/mm2
(a) 25 mm (b) 50 mm
(c) 75 mm (d) 100 mm 17. For The analysis of thick cylinders, the theory
applicable is (ESE-2003)
12. Consider the following statements in respect of a (a) Lame’s theory (b) Rankine’s theory
thick cylinder subjected to internal pressure: (c) Poisson’s theory (d) Courbon’s theory
1. The stress on an element on the outer wall
is unidirectional 18. In thin hollow cylinder hoop stress is
2. The stress on an element on the inner wall (ESE-2003)
are principal stress. pd pd pd pd
3. The constants of the Lame’s equation are (a) 8t (b) 4t (c) 2t (d) t
positive.
Which of these statements are correct?(ESE-1999) 19. A thin cylinder of thickness ‘t’, width ‘b’ and
(a) 1 and 2 (b) 1 and 3 internal radius ‘r’ is subjected to a pressure ‘p’ on
(c) 2 and 3 (d) 1,2 and 3 the entire internal surface. What is the change in
radius of the cylinder? (µ is the Poisson’s ratio and
13. The ratio of tensile stress developed in the wall of E is the modulus of elasticity)? (ESE-2006)
a boiler in the longitudinal direction to the tensile p2 r _2 − µ i pr2 ^2 − uh
stress in the circumferential direction due to an (a) Et (b) Et
internal pressure is` (ESE-2001) pr2 _ 2 − µ i p 1 − µi
_
(a) 4 (b) 2 (c) 0.25 (d) 0.5 (c) (d)
2Et Etr2
14. Assertion (A): The intensity of the longitudinal 20. A thin cylindrical tube closed at ends is subjected
stress is one half of the intensity of hoopstress to internal pressure. A torque is also applied to the
or circumferential stress in a thin cylindral shell tube. The principal stresses p1 and p2 developed are
subjected to internal pressure. 80.0 units and 20.0 units respectively. If the yield
Reason (R): the stresses in the longitudinal and stress is 240 units, then what is the factor of safety
circumferential directions develop when a thin according to maximum shear stress theory?
cylindral shell is subjected to internal force which (ESE-2006)
tries to burst the cylinder. (ESE-2002) (a) 3.00 (b) 4.00 (c) 5.00 (d) 6.00
250 Solid Mechanics
21. A thin cylinder of unit length, thickness ‘t’ and 03. Ans: (b)
radius ‘r’ is subjected to internal pressure ‘p’. What Sol: D = 6 cm
is the circumferential stress? (ESE-2008) t = 0.2 cm
(a) pr/2Et (b) pr/2t σh = 3600 kg/cm2
(c) pr/t (d) 2pr/t PD
σ h = 2t
22. A water main 160 cm dia. contains water at a P#6
pressure head of 200 m. Take weight of water to 3600 = 2 # 0.2
be 1000 kg/m3. The thickness of the metal shell P = 240 kg/cm2
required for the water main, given that the maximum
permissible stress in the metal is 400 kg/cm2, will 04. Ans: (d)
be (ESE-2013) Sol: In thin cylinder σl = σh/2
(a) 1 cm (b) 2 cm (c) 3 cm (d) 4 cm
06. Ans: (b)
Sol: In a thick cylinder subjected to internal pressure,
Hoop stress is maximum on inner surface and
01.(d) 02.(c) 03.(b) 04.(d) 05.(c) minimum on outer surface with hyperbolic variation
06.(b) 07.(d) 08.(d) 09.(b) 10.(a) across the thickness.
11. (b) 12. (d) 13.(d) 14.(b) 15.(d)
07. Ans: (d)
16. (c) 17.(a) 18.(c) 19.(c) 20.(a)
21. (c) 22. (d) Sol: Hoop stress in a thin cylinder
PD P ]6 g
σ h = 2t ; 3600 = 2 # 0.3
01. Ans: (d)
PD PD The internal pressure, P = 360 kg/cm2
Sol: (σh)cylinder = 2t ; (σh)sphere = 4t
08. Ans: (d)
To obtain same hoop stress in cylinder & in hemi
Sol: Eddy’s theory is not related to torsion of shafts, it is
spherical portion. related to arches.
(σh)cylinder= (σh)sphere
09. Ans: (b)
: PD D :=
PD D 1^ h

=
4t sphere ` t sphere 2 t cylinder
]σ hg cylinder b 2t l
2t cylinder Sol: PD
]σ hg sphere
= =2
02. Ans: (c) b PD l
4t
1
Sol: Use σ h = 2σ , and µ = m
10. Ans: (a)
ε , = E − µ E = E _1 − 2µ i
σ, σh σ,
Sol: for a thin cylinder, hoop strain is
εh σh − σ, σ, _ − i σ σ
E µE E 2 µ ε h = Eh − µ E,
PD
Where hoop stress,σh = 2t and
b1 − 2 l
= m = m−2
PD
2− m
1 2m − 1 Longitudinal stress, σl = 4t
Chapter 11 Columns
01. A column buckles at a crippling load of 500 05. A column of length l is hinged at both the ends and
units when effectively held at both ends and also restrained from lateral displacement at mid height.
restrained against rotation at both ends. The critical load of the column is given by (other
What would be the crippling load when one end is symbols have the usual meaning) (ESE-1994)
restrained only against rotation? (ESE -1992)
π2 EI 2π2 EI
(a) 400 units (b) 250 units (a)
(b)
,2 ,2
(c) 330 units (d) 500 units
4π2 EI π2 EI
(c) (d)
,2 4, 2
02. If K is defined as the ratio of Young’s modulus of
elasticity and the permissible stress in compression 06. Four vertical columns of the same material, height
of a material used in the construction of a column, and weight have the same end conditions. The
then the Rankine’s constant used in finding the load buckling load will be the largest for a column
carrying capacity of columns is proportional to having the cross-section of a /an (ESE-1994)
(ESE -1993) (a) solid square (b) thin hollow circle
1
(a) K (b) K (c) solid circle (d) I-section
1
(c) K (d) 07. Given that the density of earth is w, the angle of
K
repose is φ and h is the height of the wall and the
03. A load P is acting on the diagonal of a square earth retained is level, the active earth pressure P on
column of size D, as shown in the given figure. For a retaining wall is given by (ESE-1994)
no tension, the maximum distance of the load from
wh2 1 − sin φ wh2 1 − sin φ
the centre ‘O’ is (ESE-1993) (a) 3 # + (b) 2 # +
1 sin φ 1 sin φ
(a) D/8
wh 1 + sin φ2
wh 2
1 + sin φ
(c) 3 # − (d) 3 # −
D 1 sin φ 1 sin φ
(b) 6 P
08. If the crushing stress in the material of a mild
D 2 0
(c) 6 steel column is 3300 kg/cm2. Euler’s Formula for
crippling load is applicable for slenderness ratio
D 2
(d) 12 equal to or greater than (ESE-1995)
(a) 40 (b) 50 (c) 60 (d) 80
04. A short column of external diameter D and internal
diameter d, is subjected to a load W, with an 09. Which one of the following pairs is not correctly
eccentricity e, causing zero stress at an extreme matched? (ESE - 1995)
fibre. Then the value of ‘e’ must be (ESE-1994)\ Boundary conditions Euler’s Buckling
of column load
D2 + d2 D2 + d2
(a)
8πD (b) 8D a. Pin-Pin π2EI/l2
b. Fixed-Fixed 4π2EI/l2
D2 - d2 D3 + d3
(c) 8D (d) c. Fixed-Free 0.25 π2EI/l2
8D2
d. Fixed –Pin 2 π2 EI/,2

254 Solid Mechanics
10. The resultant cuts the base of a circular column of 13. For a circular column having its ends hinged, the
diameter ‘d’ with an eccentricity equal to d/4. The slenderness ratio is 160. The l/d ratio of the columns
ratio between the maximum compressive stress and is (ESE-1996)
the maximum tensile stress is (ESE-1995) (a) 80 (b) 57 (c) 40 (d) 20
(a) 3 (b) 4 (c) 5 (d) infinity
14. A hollow circular column of internal diameter d and
11. Consider the following statements for a rectangular external diameter 1.5 d is subjected to compressive
footing of length ‘l’ and breadth ‘b’ applied with load. The maximum distance of the point of
load P as shown in the given figure. (ESE-1995) application of load from the center for no tension
A l B is (ESE-1996)
d 13d
(a) 8 (b) 48
P d 13d
(c) 4 (d) 96

C D
15. Match List-I (given sections) with List-II (shape of
Load 'P' is acting normal to cross-section
the core) to ensure no tension condition and select
1. The stresses developed at points A and D are
the correct answer using the codes given below the
equal
lists: (ESE-1996)
2. The stress developed at point B is maximum
List –I List-II
3. The stresses developed at points B and C
A. Rectangular 1. Circle
are compressive
B. I-section 2. Annulus
Of these statements
C. Hollow circular 3. Rhombus
(a) 1,2 and 3 are correct (b) 1 and 2 are correct
D. Square 4. I-section
5. Square
6. Rectangular
12. Assertion (A): In the vertical face of triangular Codes:
retaining wall of any
h A B C D A B C D
b ratio, the eccentricity is (a) 4 6 1 2 (b) 3 3 1 5
b
6 for dead storage condition. (c) 6 4 2 5 (d) 3 4 5 1
Reason (R): For triangular retaining wall under
16. Assertion (A): The buckling load for a column of
full storage level(retained by vertical face) the specified material, cross-section and end conditions
b h calculated as per Euler’s formula varies inversely
eccentricity will be 6 only if
b ratio is s
with the column length
(where S is specific gravity of the material of the
Reason (R): Euler’s formula takes into account the
wall) (ESE-1995) end conditions in determining the effective length
Codes: of column. (ESE-1996)
explanation of A 17. A column ABCD (2y1×2y2) of rectangular section
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not a correct carries a load P at Z having the coordinates (x,y) as
explanation of A shown in the given figure. If the compressive stresses
(c) A is true but R is false are taken as positive and Area A=2y1×2y2=4y1y2
(d) A is false but R is true and the moment of inertia about x and y axis being
255 Columns
Ixx and Iyy respectively, then the stress at the corner 21. The rectangular column shown in the below figure
D is (ESE-1996) carries a load P having eccentricities ex and ey along
P the x-axis and y axis respectively. The stress at any
A,D B,C point (s,y) is given by (ESE-1998)
A B
Z y1
Y
X X P
O
ey d
D C ex
y2
Elevation b
A B
P Py Px P Py Px
(a) A + I y1 + I yy y2 (b) A - I y1 - I yy y2
xx xx P c + 12e y y + 12e x x m
(a)
P Py Px P P.y Px bd 1 d2 b2
(c) A + I y1 + I xx y2 (d) A - I y1 - I xx y2
(b) c1 + m
yy yy
12e y y 12e x x
+
d2 b2
18. A short column of external diameter D1 and internal
diameter D2 carries an external load W. For no- P c + 6e y y + 6e x x m
(b)
tension condition, the eccentricity will be bd 1 d2 b2
(ESE-1997) P c + 6e y y + 6e x x m
(b)
^D12 - D22h ^D22 - D12h bd 1 b2 d2
(a) 8D2 (b) 8D2
^D12 + D22h ^ D1 + D 2 h 22. If the eccentricity of total self-weight ‘W’ of a
(c) 8D1 (d) 8D1 masonry dam an its base is equal to-fourth of base
width B, then the maximum pressure at the base is
19. If ρ is the specific gravity of the material used in the given by (ESE-1998)
design of a masonry dam of triangular section, then
2W 4W 5W 8W
the ratio between the height and base width of the (a) 3B (b) 3B (c) 2B (d) 3B
dam for structural safety and stability is equal to
(ESE-1997) 23. A reinforced concrete footing loaded with a
1 1 concentrated load P as shown in the given figure
(a) 2 (b) ρ (c) ρ (d)
ρ produces maximum bending stresses of 10 kN/m2

and 15 kN/m2 due to eccentricities about XX and
20. A tie bar (20 mm ×10 mm) carries a tensile load of
YY axes respectively. If the direct stress due to
1 kN as shown in the below figure. Under this load,
load acting at P is 18 kN/m2 (compressive), then the
the maximum intensity of stress over the mean
intensity of resultant stress at corner B will be
value will increase by (ESE-1997)
Y (ESE-1999)
20mm
D C
1mm
10mm
X X
oP
A
(a) 20% (b) 40% (c) 60% (d) 80% Y
256 Solid Mechanics
(a) 13 kN/m2 tensile 28. A short hollow CI column section ‘A’ is 150 cm2
(b) 13 kN/m2 compressive and the section modulus Z=10×105 mm3 carries
(c) 31 kN/m2 compressive i) an axial load of 250 kN, and
(d) 31 kN/m2 tensile ii) a load of 50 kN on a bracket, the load line
being 500 mm from the axis of column.
24. A column base is subjected to moment. If the The maximum and minimum stress intensities are
intensity of bearing pressure due to axial load is (ESE-2001)
equal to stress due to the moment, then the bearing (a) 50 N/mm tensile and 10 N/mm compressive
2 2
pressure between the base and the concrete is (b) 45 N/mm2 compressive and 5 N/mm2 tensile
(a) uniform compression throughout (c) 55 N/mm2 compressive and 5 N/mm2 tensile
(b) zero at one end and compression at the other (d) 60 N/mm2 tensile and 10 N/mm2 compressive
end
(c) tension at one end and compression at the 29. Assertion (A): whenever a column section is
other end subjected to an eccentric loading, it causes a direct
(d) uniform tension throughout stress, as well as the bending stress to come into
play. Since both these stresses act normal to the
25. Assertion (A): Rankine’s theory is generally used cross-section, these can be algebraically added into
for finding out the buckling load of intermediate a single resultant stress.
columns. Reason (R): The maximum and minimum
Reason (R): Euler’s theory gives higher values for intensities of stress at the base of the column are
buckling load in intermediate columns.(ESE-1999) (ESE-2002)
σ max = db :1 + d D σ max = db :1 − d D
W 6e W 6e
26. Assertion (A): In the retaining wall shown
in the figure when the ratio (h/b) = s , the
eccentricity is b/6 whether the storage is nil or full. Where,
Reason (R): The resultant force will pass through W = weight of column per unit length
the centroid of the pressure distribution diagram on b = width of the column; d = depth
the base for the nil or full storage if the ratio (h/b) e = eccentricity of the load

= s (ESE-1999)
30. Which one of the following pairs is NOT correctly
matched? (ESE-2002)
Water h Boundary Euler’s buckling
Sp.gr=s conditions of column Load
]π2 EIg
(a) Both ends hinged :
b L2
]4π2 EIg
27. Which one of the following rules ascertains the (b) Both ends Fixed :
L2
maximum permissible eccentricity of loads on ]π2 EIg
circular column so that stress will always be (c) One end fixed and other end free :
4L2
compressive? (ESE-2001)
2 π2 EI
(a) Middle fourth rule (b) Middle third rule (d) One end fixed and other end hinged:
L2
(c) Middle half rule (d) Middle two-third rule
257 Columns
31. The slenderness ratio of a compression member

in the context of Rankine’s formula is defined B
as
(ESE-2002) 4m P
(a) Length/least lateral dimension
(b) effective length/least radius of gyration C e
(c) effective length/least lateral dimension
(d) length/least radius of gyration 6m
32. Match List –I (End conditions of columns) with

List –II (Effective Length,) and select the correct A
1. Shear force is constant throughout
List –I List –II 2. Maximum moment in the column is Pe.
3. The compressive axial force in the column is
A. Both ends fixed 1. le = 2l 0.4P.
, Which of these statements is /are correct ?
B. Both ends hinged 2. le = 2
(a) 1, 2, and 3 (b) 1 only
, (c) 1 and 3 (d) 2 only
C. One end fixed, other free 3. , e =
2
35. For a masonry dam of base width b, at which
D. One end fixed, other hinged 4. le= l location w.r.t the central line, should the resultant
loading intersect the sections to avoid tension in
(Where l is the length and le is the effective length
any horizontal section? (ESE-2007)
of the column) (ESE-
(a) Outside of b/6 (b) Within b/6
2003)
(c) Within b/8 (d) At the central line
Codes:
A B C D A B C D
36. A simply supported beam AB of span L carries two
(a)
2 4 1 3 (b) 3 1 2 4
concentrated loads W each at points L/3 from A and
(c)
2 4 3 1 (d) 3 1 4 2
B. What is the SF in the middle one-third portion of
the beam? (ESE-2008)
33. For a solid circular section of diameter d, the
(a) W/2 (b) 2W (c) W (d) Zero
stress in a column will be compressive only if the
eccentricity of the line of action of the compressive
37. A circular column of external diameter D, and
force is within (ESE-2003)
internal diameter d, carries an eccentric load such
d d that tension is developed nowhere. What shall be
(a) 4 (b) 8
the diameter of the core? (ESE-2009)
d d
(c) 6 (d) 16
D2 + d2 D2 - d2
(a) 8D (b) 8D
34. Consider the following statements for the column
with a bracket as shown in the figure given below: D2 + d2 D2 - d2
(c) 4D (d) 4D
(ESE-2005)
258 Solid Mechanics
38. If the Euler load for a steel column is 1000 kN and 43. A steel column is pinned at both ends and has a
crushing load is 1500 kN, the Rankine load is equal buckling load of 200 kN. If the column is restrained
to (ESE-2010) against lateral movement at its mid-height, its
(a) 2500 kN (b) 1500 kN buckling load will be (ESE – 2018)
(c) 1000 kN (d) 600 kN (a) 100 kN (b) 200 kN
(c) 400 kN (d) 800 kN
39. The base of a column is subjected to moment. If
the intensity of bearing pressure due to axial load 44. A 1.5 m long column has a circular cross-section of
is equal to stress due to moment, then the bearing 50 mm diameter. Consider Rankine’s formula with
pressure between the base and the concrete is 1
values of fc = 560 N/mm2, α = 1600 for pinned
(ESE-2011) ends and factor of safety of 3. If one end of the
(a) Uniform compression throughout column is fixed and the other end is free, the safe
(b) Zero at one end and compression at the other load will be (ESE-2019)
end (a) 9948 N (b) 9906 N
(c) Tension at one end and compression at the (c) 9864 N (d) 9822 N
other end
(d) Compression, varying as a parabolic profile 45. A strut is made of a circular bar, 5 m long and pin-
jointed at both ends. When freely supported the bar
40. Consider a circular member of diameter D subjected gives a mid-span deflection of 10 mm under a load
to a compressive load P. For a condition of no of 80 N at the centre. The critical load will be
tensile stress in the cross-section, the maximum (ESE-2019)
radial distance of the load from the centre of the (a) 8485 N (b) 8340 N
circle is (ESE – 2014) (c) 8225 N (d) 8110 N
D D D D
(a) 6 (b) 8 (c) 12 (d) 4 46. Which of the following assumptions are made with
respect to Euler’s theory applied to columns?
1. The section of the column is uniform
41. A wall carries an axial load, 12 kN/m and also 2. The length of the column is very large
an eccentric load of 27 kN/m at 72 mm from the compared to the lateral dimensions
central axis of the wall. The equivalent eccentricity 3. The direct stress is large when compared with
e is nearly (ESE– 2015) the bending stress (ESE – 2020)
(a) 65 mm (b) 60 mm (a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 3 only
(c) 55 mm (d) 50 mm (c) 2 and 3 only (d) 1 and 2 only
42. A beam-column is alternately bent either (1) in

single curvature, or (2) in double curvature. The
secondary moments induced are to be compared.
These are indicated SM1 and SM2 as per the
conditions (1) and (2) respectively (ESE-2017)
(a) SM1 > SM2 (b) SM1 < SM2
(c) SM1 = SM2 (d) Cannot be ascertained
259 Columns
04. Ans: (b)

KEY & Detailed Solutions P Pe
Sol: σ min = 0 = A − z
01. (b) 02. (a) 03.(d) 04.(b) 05. (c) π ^ 4 − 4h
Z D d
06. (b) 07. (b) 08. (d) 09. (d) 10. (a) e = A = πD32
^ 2 − 2h
11. (c) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (b) 4 D d
^ 2 + 2h^ 2 − 2h 2
+ 2
16. (d) 17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20. (c) = 1 D d 2 D2 d = D d
8D ^D − d h 8D
21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (b) 24. (b) 25. (a)
26. (b) 27. (a) 28. (b) 29. (a) 30. (d)
05. Ans: (c)
31. (b) 32. (a) 33. (b) 34. (c) 35. (b) Sol:
36. (d) 37. (c) 38. (d) 39. (b) 40. (b) L/2

L
41. (d) 42. (a) 43. (d) 44. (b) 45. (c) ,e = 2
46. (d) π2 4π2
Pe = L/2
2 EI = EI
bLl L2
2
01. Ans: (b) 06. Ans: (b)
Sol: Sol: Thin hollow section have maximum moment of
] bLl
, Fix - Fixg
2
PHinge - Fix 2 inertia.

= = 2 1
2 =
^, Hinge - Fixh

d n
2
PFix - Fix L 2
07. Ans: (b)
2
Sol: Rankine’s minimum depth of foundation
P=
1=] g w.h2 =1 − sin φ G
Hinge - Fix
2 500 250 units Df =
2 1 + sin φ
02. Ans: (a)
08. Ans: (d)
E
Sol: K = Sol: For mild steel E = 2 × 106 kg/cm2
fc
fc = yield stress of steel
Rankine's formula
From Euler’s equation
fc ]Ag
PR = r2
1 + αλ2 fc = E
m2
α = Rankines constant (∝E)
3300 = 2 ]2 # 106g
π2
f 1
PR \ Ec = k
λ

∴λ = 80
03. Ans: (d)
Sol: For No tension 09. Ans: (d)
Sol: For a long column with, Fix – Hinge supports
D3 L
Z 6 2 ,=
=
e A = = D 2
D2 6 2 π2 2π2
Pe = =
d where n
I D3 EI EI
= Z y= d n
L 2 L2
max 6 2 2
But, given answer is wrong.
Chapter 12 Deflections
01. A simply supported beam A carries a point load at 05. Consider the following statements:
it mid-span. Another identical beam B carries the If a simply supported beam of uniform cross-
same load but uniformly distributed over the entire section is subjected to a clockwise moment at the
span. The ratio of the maximum deflection of the left support and an equal anticlockwise moment at
beam A to beam B will be (ESE -1992) the right support, then the (ESE-1994)
(a) 5/3 (b) 8/5 (c) 5/8 (d) 3/5 1. B.M.D will be in the shape of a rectangle
2. S.F.D will be a straight line coinciding with the
02. The end deflection to the cantilever with a couple base
acting at the end as shown in the figure, is 3. Deflection curve will be in the shape of a
(ESE -1992) circular arc.
M Of these statements
l
ML2 ML2 06. Which of the following pairs of a given beam and
(a) 2EI (b) 8EI
its conjugate beam are correctly matched?
2ML2 ML
(c) EI (d) 4EI A B A B
1.
03. A simply supported beam of span ‘L’ and uniform l
l
flexural rigidity EI, carries a central load ‘W’ and A
B
total uniformly distributed load ‘W’ throughout the A B
2. l
span. The maximum deflection is given by l
(ESE -1993) A hinge
3. A B C D D
B C
13WL3 5WL3 a a
(a) 96EI (b) 384EI l a l a
5W 3 13WL3 4. A C
(c) 96EI (d) 384EI B C A B
a a
l l
04. An overhanging beam of overall length L and
uniform flexural rigidity EI is loaded by two Select the correct answer using the codes given
concentrated loads at the two ends. The beam is below: (ESE-1994)
supported symmetrically on two supports with (a) 2,3 and 4 (b) 1,3 and 4
overhang ‘a’ on each side as shown in the given (c) 1,2 and 4 (d) 1,2 and 3
figure? The vertical deflection upwards at the centre
of the beam is given by (ESE -1993) 07. A beam simply-supported at both the ends, of length
‘L’ carries two equal unlike couples M at two ends.
Pa ^L − 2ah2 Pa2 L ^L − 2ah If the flexural rigidity EI=constant, then central
(a) 8EI (b) 8EI deflection of the beam is given by (ESE-1995)
PaL2 Pa ^L − ah
2
(a) ML2/4EI (b) ML2/16 EI
(c) 8EI (d) 8EI (c) M2/64 EI (d) ML2/8EI
266 Solid Mechanics
08. What is the horizontal deflection at free end C of 11. A cantilever carries a load P at C as shown in the
the frame shown in the given figure? (ESE-1995) given figure. The deflection at B is (ESE-1996)

P
B
L M l
C C B
A
L EI = Constant L

A P, 2 ^ − h P, 2 ^ − h
(a) 2EI L , (b) 3EI L ,
(c) 2EI b L − 3 l (d) 3EI b L − 3 l

ML2 ML2 P, 2 , P, 2 ,
(a) 2EI (b) EI
3ML2 2ML2 12. A simply supported rectangular beam of span L and

(c) 2EI (d) EI
d carries a central load W. The ratio of maximum
09. The maximum deflection of a fixed beam carrying a deflection to maximum bending stress is
central load W is equal to (ESE-1996) (ESE-1997)
WL3 WL3 L2 L2 L2 L2
(a) 484EI (b) 96EI (a) (b) (c) (d)
6Ed 8Ed 4Ed 12Ed
WL3 5WL3
(c) 192EI (d) 384EI 13. Consider the following statements regarding a beam
of uniform cross-section simply supported at its
10. For the cantilever beam shown in the given figure,
ends and carrying a concentrated load at one of the
which one of the following pairs is not correctly
third points:
matched? (ESE-1996)
1. Its deflection under the load will be maximum
W 2. The bending moment under the load will be
X
B maximum
A
l 3. The deflection at the mid-point of the span will
be maximum
Theorem
4. The slope at the nearest support will be
(a) Mohr’s Theorem
maximum (ESE-1997)
(b) Castigliano’s Theorem
(a) 1 and 3 are correct (b) 2 and 4 are correct
(c) Conjugate beam Theorem
(d) Successive integration
14. Assertion (A): Macaulay’s method to determine the
EI times deflection at B
slope and deflection at a point in a beam is suitable
01. Area of BMD×Distance of centroid of BM
for beams subjected to concentrated loads and can
from B
be extended to uniformly distributed loads.
1
Reason (R): Macaulay’s method is based upon
02. # Wx2 dx
the modification of moment area method. This
0
is applicable to a simple beam carrying a single
03.Shear force at the fixed end of conjugate beam
concentrated load but by superposition, this method

can be extended to cover any kind of loading.
04. ## − W dx
(ESE-1999)
267 Deflections
Codes: 18. The maximum deflection of simply supported beam

(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct occurs at zero (ESE-2001)
explanation of A (a) bending moment location
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not a correct (b) shear force location
explanation of A (c) slope location
(c) A is true but R is false (d) shear force location and also zero bending
(d) A is false but R is true moment location
15. In a cantilever of span ‘L’ subjected to a concentrated 19. Which of the following is/are determined at point of
load of ‘W’ acting at a distance of (1/3) L from the a given by moment area method?
free end, the deflection under load will be 1. Shear force 2. Bending moment
(ESE-2000) 3. Slope 4. Deflection
(a) WL /3 EI
3
(b) WL /81 EI
3
(c) 14 WL /81 EI
3
(d) 8 WL3/81 EI below: (ESE-2001)
(a) 1 and 2 (b) 3 alone
16. A rigid cantilever frame ABC is fixed at C and (c) 4 alone (d) 3 and 4
carries a couple µ at the free end A as shown in the
given figure below. Neglecting axial deformation 20. Consider the loaded beam shown in the given
and assuming the flexural rigidity EI to be constant figure:
throughout the frame, the vertical deflection of A is EI is constant
L W
A B
A C D
B µ l/2
a l a
H
C Assertion (A): The deflection at the free end ‘C’ is
‘a’ times the slope at A.
Reason (R): The elastic curve for the overhang
µL µL2
(a) EI b H + 2 l (b) EI b H + 2 l
L L
portion AC or BD is a straight line tangential to the
elastic curve at A and B. (ESE- 2001)
µL2 H µH H
(c) 2EI b 2 + L l (d) EI b 2 + L l
21. For determining the deflection 'y' of a loaded beam
17. A simply supported beam ‘A’ carries a point at a distance X by Macaulay’s method, which one
load at its midspan. Another identical beam ‘B’ or more of the following is/are used?
carries same magnitude of load but it is uniformly
1. The basic differential equation for deflection
distributed over the entire span. The ratio of the
d2 y
maximum deflections of beams ‘A’ and ‘B’ will be EI = −M where EI is the flexural rigidity
dx2
(ESE-2001)
of the beam, M is the bending moment.
2. Successive integration of the differential
(a) b 3 l (b) b 3 l (c) b 5 l (d) b 5 l
8 2 3 8
equation given in 1.
3. Known positions of zero slope and zero
deflection in the beam
268 Solid Mechanics
Select the correct answer using the codes given List – I

below: (ESE-2003) A. Cantilever with concentrated load W at free
(a) 1 only (b) 1 and 2 end
(c) 3 only (d) 1,2 and 3 B. Cantilever with udl (w/unit length) across the
complete span (W = wl)
22. Moments of the same sense are applied to both the
C. Simply supported beam with concentrated
ends of a simply supported beam. The ratio of the
load W at the centre
rotation of the two ends is 2. What is the ratio of the
D. Simply supported beam with udl (w/unit
applied moments? (ESE-2004)
length) across complete span (W = wl)
(a) 3/2 (b) 4/3 (c) 5/4 (d) 6/5
List – II
Wl2 Wl2
23. The free end of a cantilever beam is supported by 1. 16EI 2. 24EI
the free end of another cantilever beam using a
Wl2 Wl2
roller as shown in the figure given below. What is 3. 2EI 4. 6EI
the deflection at the roller support B? (ESE-2005) Codes:
P A B C D A B C D

(a)
1 2 3 4 (b) 3 4 1 2
A B (c)
1 4 3 2 (d) 3 2 1 4
3a
C
2a 27. Match List – I (Load case) with List – II (Expression
EI is constant
for slope/Deflection) and select the correct answer

using the codes given below the lists (Flexural
8Pa3 9Pa3 64Pa3 72Pa3 rigidity = EI): (ESE-2007)
(a) 3EI (b) 3EI (c) 35EI (d) 35EI
For a cantilever beam
24. What is the vertical displacement at the point C of List – I
the structure shown in the figure given below? A. Slope for trip load of W
(ESE-2005) B. Deflection for trip load of W
A B
(3a,I) (a,I) C. Slope for total UDL of W
P D. Deflection for total UDL of W
EI constant
3 List – II
9Pa
(a) 2EI (b)
27Pa3
(c)
27Pa3
(d)
3Pa3 1. WL3/8EI 2. WL3/6EI
3EI 8EI 8EI 3. WL3/3EI 4. WL2/2EI
25. The deflection at the free end of a uniformly loaded Codes:
cantilever of length 1m is 7.5mm. What is the slope A B C D A B C D
at the free end? (ESE-2005) (a) 4 2 3 1 (b) 1 3 2 4
(a) 0.01 radian (b) 0.015 radian (c) 4 3 2 1 (d) 1 2 3 4
(c) 0.02 radian (d) 0.025 radian
28. Which one of the following is the reaction of the
26. Match List-I (Loading Condition) with List-II cantilever at B as shown in the figure below?
(Maximum Slope) and select the correct answer (ESE-2007)
D
w/per unit length l/2
using the codes given below the lists (E= Modulus
B
of elasticity, I= Area moment of inertia): A
EI,l l/2
(ESE-2006) C
269 Deflections
32. A cantilever carries a uniformly distributed total load

3 5
(a) 8 wl (b) 8 wl W over its whole length and a concentrated upward
load W at its free end. The net vertical deflection at
6 3
(c) 17 wl (d) 21 wl the free end is (ESE-2012)
5 Wl3
(a) Zero (b) 24 . EI downwards
29. In the structure shown in the figure below, what
5 Wl3 5 Wl3
is the distance through which the points A move (c) 24 . EI upwards (d) 48 . EI upwards
towards each other? (ESE-2007)
P A A P 33. If a cantilever beam of span L and flexural rigidity
EI carries a moment M at the free end, the deflection
at that end is (ESE-2012)
2a ML ML2
(a) 24EI (b) 12EI
EI is constant
ML ML2
B C (c) 6EI (d) 2EI
a
(a) 4Pa3/EI (b) 16Pa3/3EI 34. For the beam-system as shown, if the deflection at
(c) 40Pa3/3EI (d) 6Pa3/EI P
C is zero, then the ratio Q is (ESE-2012)
30. A simply supported beam AB of span 4m is P

subjected to terminal couples as shown in the figure B C
below. (ESE-2009) A

4kN-m 4kN-m L L
Q
A B
3 5
(a) 8 (b) 8
4m 3 5
(c) 16 (d) 16
If EI is in kN-m , what is the magnitude of the
2
central deflection of the beam in metres ? 35. For the beam-system as shown, if the slope at M is
T
4 8 zero, then the ratio S is (ESE-2012)
(a) EI (b) EI
T
2
(c) EI
16
(d) EI
K L M
l l
31. What is the deflection at the hinge for the beam S
shown below? (ESE-2010)
1 1 1 1
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 8
P
36. Deflection limitations over beams are imposed

A I I C
B because excessive deflection may cause
L/2 L/2 (ESE-2012)
(a) undesirable twisting and distortion of end
PL3 PL3 PL3
(a) 0 (b) 3EI (c) 24EI (d) 48EI connections
270 Solid Mechanics
(b) problems in drainage system of equal intensities. One beam is 2 m long and
(c) psychological effect on users the other is 4 m long. The 2 m long beam shows
(d) All of the above a central deflection of 1 mm. What is the central
deflection of the 4 m long beam? (ESE–2015)
37. The reaction of the beam at C is (ESE-2012) (a) 16 mm (b) 2 mm
10 kN/m (c) 8 mm (d) 1 mm
Hinge
A B
4m 4m 42. If the deflection at the free end of a uniformly
loaded cantilever beam is 15 mm and the slope of
(a) 5.5 kN (b) 6.5 kN the deflection curve at the free end is 0.02 radian,
(c) 7.5 kN (d) 8.5 kN then the length of the beam is (ESE – 2015)
(a) 0.8 m (b) 1.0 m (c) 1.2 m (d) 1.5 m
38. A simply supported beam of span L shown in the
above figure is subjected to a concentrated load W
43. An overhanging beam of uniform EI is loaded as
at its mid-span and also to a uniformly distributed
shown below. The deflection at the free end is
load equivalent to W. It has a flexural rigidity of EI.
(ESE-2017)
What is the total deflection at its mid-point?
W
W (ESE-2013)
W A B C
L/2
A B l l/2
L Wl3 Wl3
(a) 81EI (b) 8EI
5 WL3 9 WL3
(a) 384 EI (b) 384 EI Wl3 2Wl3
(c) 27EI (d) 27EI
13 WL3 18 WL3
(c) 384 EI (d) 384 EI 44. A cantilever beam, 3 m long, carries a uniformly
distributed load over the entire length. If the slope
39. Clockwise moments are applied to both the ends of at the free end is 10, the deflection at the free end is
a uniform simply supported beam. If the ratio of (ESE-2017)
the rotation of two ends is 2, then the ratio of the (a) 49.27 mm (b) 39.27 mm
applied moments will be (ESE-2013) (c) 30.27 mm (d) 20.27 mm
5 7 5 3
(a) 4 (b) 5 (c) 3 (d) 2
45. A cantilever beam AB as shown in figure is
subjected to a point load of 12 kN over a span of 6
40. A hinged support in a real beam (ESE–2014)
m with E = 2 × 105 N/mm2 and Ixx = 6 × 107 mm4.
(a) becomes an internal hinge in a conjugate beam
The deflection at the free end will be (ESE – 2020)
(b) change to a free support in a conjugate beam
(c) changes to a fixed support in a conjugate beam W
(d) remains as a hinged support in a conjugate A B
beam
l
41. Two simply supported beams are made up of the
same material and are of the same cross-section. (a) 80 mm (b) 72 mm
Both beams carry uniformly distributed loads (c) 64 mm (d) 56 mm
271 Deflections
46. A simply supported beam of span 8 m carries a 01. Ans: (b)

uniformly distributed load of 24 kN/m run over the Sol: W
whole span. The beam is propped at the middle of
l/2 l/2
the span. The values of E = 200 × 106 kN/m2 and Total load,W
I = 20 × 10-5 m4. The amount by which the prop wl 3
y A = 48EI
should yield in order to make all three reactions
equal will be nearly (ESE – 2020) 5wl3
y B = 384EI
(a) 20 mm (b) 15 mm
(c) 10 mm (d) 5 mm yA 1 384 8
=
=
y B 48 # 5 5
47. A cantilever beam ACB has end A fixed and
subjected to a point load P at free end B. The point 02. Ans: (a)
C is mid-point of AB and the moment of inertia of Sol:
l
AC is twice that of CB. The deflection at the free M
end will be (ESE – 2020)
ML2
P δ = 2EI
A 03. Ans: (d)

2I C I B
Sol:
W
l/2 l/2
P, 3 P, 3 5P,3 9P,3 W
(a) 3EI (b) 48EI (c) 96EI (d) 48EI

48. A beam of uniform cross-section, simply supported Total deflection at central span
at ends carries a concentrated load W at midspan. y = yudl + ypoint load
If the ends of the beam are fixed and only load P is
= 5wl + wl = 13Wl
3 3 3
applied at the midspan such that the deflection at 384EI 48EI 384EI
the centre remains the same, the value of the load P
will be (ESE – 2020) 04. Ans: (a)
(a) 6W (b) 4W (c) 2W (d) W Sol:
P P

a a
(L−2a)
01. (b) 02. (a) 03. (d) 04. (a) 05. (a)
]Pag^L − 2ah2
06. (b) 07. (d) 08. (a) 09. (c) 10. (c) yup at the central span = 8EI
11. (c) 12. (a) 13. (b) 14. (c) 15. (d)
16. (a) 17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (d) 20. (a) 05. Ans: (a)
21. (d) 22. (c) 23. (d) 24. (a) 25. (a) Sol:
M M
26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (c) 29. (c) 30. (b)
31. (d) 32. (c) 33. (d) 34. (d) 35. (c)
SFD
36. (d) 37. (c) 38. (c) 39.(a) 40. (d)
41. (a) 42. (b) 43. (b) 44. (b) 45. (b) BMD
46. (b) 47. (d) 48. (b)
Chapter 13 Propped Cantilevers &Fixed Beams
01. The maximum negative bending moment in case of 2. increases the positive moment
a fixed beam carrying uniformly distributed load is 3. reduces the positive moment
at (ESE -1992) 4. increases the positive moment at the centre of
(a) Mid-span (b) 1/3 of the span span
(c) 1/4 of the span (d) Supports Of these statements (ESE -1993)
(a) 1 and 4 are correct (b) 1 and 3 are correct
02. For the continuous beam (EI constant) loaded as (c) 2 and 3 are correct (d) 2 and 4 are correct
shown in the figure given, the moment at ‘B’ is
(ESE -1993) 05. In the structure in the given figure, the fixed end
moment at joint A is (ESE-1994)
W W

l/2 B l/2 C P
A
A I I B
l l
2I
L/4 L/2 L/4

(a) 0.75 times free moment at mid-span of AB
(b) same as the free moment at mid-span of AB
PL 5PL
(c) 1.5 times free moment at mid-span of AB (a) 16 (b) 48
(d) 2 times free moment at mid-span of AB
7PL PL
(c) 64 (d) 8
03. A fixed beam AB of length ‘l’ having constant
flexural rigidity EI carries two loads P at its third 06. A fixed beam of uniform section is carrying a point
points C and D as shown in the given figure. load at its mid-span. If the moment of inertia of
Numerically, maximum bending moment will the middle half length is now reduced to half its
occur (ESE -1993) previous value, then the fixed end moments will
P P (ESE-1997)
l/3 l/3 l/3 (a) increase (b) decrease
A B
C C (c) remain constant (d) change their direction
l

(a) at C and at D and will be equal to 2Pl/9
A cantilever beam of length ‘I’ is loaded with
Pl uniformly distributed load ‘w’ on the span. The
(b) between C and D and will be equal to 9
2Pl beam is propped at the free end having its levels
(c) at A and B and will be equal to 9
same as that of the fixed end (EI is constant).
(d) between A and C and also between B and D

and will be equal to Pl/9 wl
1. The prop reaction is 2
04. Consider the following statements 3

2. The prop reaction is 8 wl
Sinking of an intermediate support of a continuous
beam wl2
3. The bending moment at the prop= 2
1. reduces the negative moment at support
281 Propped Cantilevers & Fixed Beams
3
4. SF is zero at x = 8 from the propped end.
Which of these statements are corrected W/unit length
(ESE-2001)
(a) 1 and 3 (b) 2 and 3 A B
(c) 1 and 4 (d) 2 and 4
l
08. A straight cantilever of uniform cross-section

Wl2 Wl2 Wl2 Wl2
carries a total load ‘W’ distributed evenly over its (a) 30 and 20 (b) 20 and 30
entire length. If the free end of the cantilever is now
Wl2 Wl2 Wl2 Wl2
propped upto the level of the fixed end, the vertical (c) 12 and 8 (d) 8 and 12
force required at the prop is (ESE-2001)

(a) b 8 l W (b) b 8 l W
3 5
12. A fixed beam is loaded as in figure. The fixed end
moment at support A is (ESE – 2018)
(c) b 4 l W (d) W
3

W/m
09. What is the reaction on the pin C for a beam as
shown in the figure below? (ESE-2009)
A B
W kN/m
L
C
A B
EI EI
wL2 wL2 wL2 wL2
L L (a) 30 (b) 20 (c) 10 (d) 8

3 1
(a) 8 wLkN (b) 2 wLkN
13. Statement (I): If degree of fixity at supports is
1 3 lessened, the maximum hogging moment at the
(c) 4 wLkN (d) 16 wLkN
ends will decrease.

Statement (II): If degree of fixity at supports is
10. If the hinged end of a propped cantilever of span lessened, the maximum sagging moment at mid-
L settles by an amount δ, then the rotation of the span decreases. (ESE-2019)
hinged end will be (ESE-2010) Codes:
δ 2δ
(a) L (b) L (a) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are
3δ 4δ individually true and Statement (II) is the
(c) 2L (d) 3L correct explanation of Statement (I)
(b) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are
11. Fixed end moments at A and B for the fixed beam individually true but statement (II) is not the
shown in the figure, subjected to the indicated correct explanation of statement (I)
uniformly varying load, are respectively (c) Statement (I) is true but Statement (II) is false
(ESE – 2014) (d) Statement (I) is false but Statement (II) is true
282 Solid Mechanics
14. A beam of length l is fixed at its both ends and carries

two concentrated loads of W each at a distance of = M b L l+ M b L l
, EI 4 2EI 4
3 from both ends. The fixed end moment at A will
be (ESE – 2020) PL2 b 1 l + PL2 1 b 1 + 1 l = ML b 1 + 1 l
EI 64 EI 8 8 16 EI 4 8
W, - 2W,
(a) - 3 (b) 9
c 1 + 1 b 2 + 1 lm PL = ML b 2 + 1 l
2
64 8 16 EI EI 8
- 6W, - 4W,
(c) 15 (d) 27
b 1 + 3 l PL = ML b 3 l
2
64 128 EI EI 8
2 + 3 b PL2 l = ML b 3 l
KEY & Detailed Solutions 128 EI EI 8
01. (d) 02. (a) 03. (c) 04. (a) 05. (b)
5PL
` M = 48
06.(a) 07.(d) 08. (a) 09.(d) 10. (c)
11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (b)
06. Ans: (a)
Sol:
01. Ans: (d)
Sol: In case of fixed beams subjected to gravity loads,
maximum hogging or negative moment develops at L L L
L 4 2 4
supports. Before change After changing
as EI value is reduced in middle half portion of the

02. Ans: (a) second case, fixed end moment developed increases
Sol: Bending moment at B = 75% mid span moment.
07. Ans: (d)
05. Ans: (b) Sol:
Sol: W
A B
l
PL
RB
8EI
Net deflection at A is zero.
PL PL R B l3 = wl 4
16EI 8EI ∴ 3EI
M 8EI
EI
3wl
RB = 8
M
2EI Statement (2) is correct.

∴ Statement (1) is wrong.
Area of Simply supported BMD and area of Fixed Bending moment at prop is zero (roller cannot resist
end BMD must be the same. bending moment).
∴ Statement (3) is wrong.
As = AF (Considering only half the area of the Obviously statement (d) is correct.
diagrams as the areas are symmetrical)
1 b PL lb L l + 1 b L lb PL + PL l
2 8EI 4 2 4 8EI 16EI
Chapter 14 Strain Energy
01. Two circular bars A and B of the same material and 05. A rectangular block of size 200 mm×100 mm×50
same length are of diameters DA and DB respectively. mm is subjected to a shear stress of 500 kg/cm2. If
The bars are subjected to the same torque T. The the modulus of rigidity of the material is 1×106 kg/
ratio of strain energies stored in the bars A and B is cm2, the strain energy stored will be (ESE-1995)
proportional to (ESE -1992) (a) 1000 kg-cm (b) 500 kg-cm
(a) DA/DB (b) DB/DA (c) 125 kg-cm (d) 100 kg-cm
(c) (DA/DB)2 (d) (DB/DA)4
06. The lists given below refer to a bar of length l cross
sectional area A, young’s modulus E, Poisson’s
02. The maximum energy stored at elastic limit of a
ratio µ and subjected to axial stress p. Match List-I
material is called (ESE -1993)
with List –II and select the correct answer using the
(a) Resilience
codes given below the lists: (ESE-1996)
(b) Proof resilience
List –I
(c) Modulus of resilience
A. Volumetric strain
(d) Bulk resilience
B. Strain energy per unit volume
C. Ratio of Young’s modulus to bulk modulus
03. The following observations refer to two metal
D. Ratio of Young’s modulus of rigidity
specimens A and B of the same size subjected to
List –II
uni-axial tension test up to failure
1. 2 (1+µ ) 2. 3(1−2µ )
1. The elastic strain energy of A is more than
3. (p/E)(1−2µ ) 4. (p2/2E)
that of B
5. 2(1−µ )
2. Area under stress-strain curve of A is less than
Codes:
that of B
A B C D A B C D
3. The yield strength of A is more than that
(a) 3 4 2 1 (b) 5 4 1 2
of B
(c) 5 4 2 1 (d) 2 3 1 5
4. The percentage elongation of A and B are
equal. 07. If the strain energy absorbed in a cantilever beam
Which one of the following statements is true in in bending under its own weight is K times greater
this regard? (ESE -1994) than the strain energy absorbed in an identical
(a) Specimen A is more ductile than Specimen B simply supported beam in bending under its own
(b) Specimen B is more ductile than specimen A weight, then the magnitude of K is (ESE-1997)
(c) The ductility of the two specimens is equal (a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 6 (d) 8
(d) The data is insufficient to compare the
08. Two shafts of solid circular cross-section are iden-
ductilities of the two specimens
tical except for their diameters d1 and d2, they are
04. A 2 m long bar of uniform section extends 2 mm subjected to the same torque T. The ratio of the
under limiting axial stress of 200 N/mm. What is U
strain energies stored U1 will be (ESE-1998)
2
the modulus of resilience for the bar? (ESE-1995)
b d1 l (b) b d1 l
4 2
(a) 0.10 units (b) 0.20 units (a) d2 d2
(c) 10000 units (d) 20000 units
b d1 l (d) b d2 l
3 4
(c) d2 d1
285 Strain Energy
09. A material of Young’s modulus ‘E’ and Poisson’s 13. A mild steel bar of uniform cross-section ‘A’ and
ratio ‘µ’ is subjected to two principal stresses σ1 and length L is subjected to an axial load ‘W’. The strain
σ2 at a point in a two-dimensional stress system. Energy stored in the bar would be (ESE-2001)
The strain energy per unit volume of the material is
WL W2 L
(ESE-1999) (a) 2AE (b) 4AE
(a) 2E σ1 σ2 2µσ1 σ2 i
1 _ 2+ 2−
WL W2 L
(c) 4AE (d) 2AE
(b) 2E _σ12 + σ22 − 2µσ1 σ2 i
1
14. Resilience is (ESE-2002)
(c) 2E _σ12 − σ22 + 2µσ1 σ2 i
1
(a) maximum strain energy
(b) recoverable strain energy
(d) 2E _σ12 − σ22 − 2µσ1 σ2 i
1
(c) total potential energy
(d) shear stress energy (Beyond Hooke’s Law)
10. The strain energy in a member is proportional to 15. A member having length L, cross-sectional area A
(ESE-2001) and modulus of elasticity E is subjected to an axial
(a) total strain multiplied by the volume of the load W. The strain energy stored in this member is
member (ESE-2003)
(b) Product of stress and the corresponding strain
WL2 WL2
(c) Product of strain ad Young’s modulus of the (a) AE (b) 2AE
material
W2 L2 W2 L
(d) The maximum strain multiplied by the length (c) 2AE (d) 2AE
of the member
16. What is the total strain energy of a member subjected
11. Strain energy in torsion of a shaft per unit volume is to an axial stress f (E= Young’s modulus)?
given y (Q is maximum shear stress, E is modulus (ESE-2006)
b l
2
of Elasticity and G is modulus of rigidity) (a) 2E f # volume of bar
(ESE-2001)
(b) b E
f l#
q2 q2
(a) 2G (b) 2E volume of bar
(c) b fE l # volume of bar

q2 q2 2
(c) 4G (d) 4E
(d) b 2E l # volume of bar

f
12. A simply supported beam of span ‘L’ is subjected
to a concentrated load W at mid-span. The strain 17. A square steel bar of 50mm side and 5m long is
Energy due to bending in the beam would be subjected to a load whereupon it absorbs a strain
(ESE-2001) energy of 100J. What is its modulus of resilience ?
W2 L3 W2 L3
(a) 48EI (b) 96EI (ESE-2009)
1
(a) 125 N-mm/mm (b)125mm /N-mm
3 3
W2 L3 W2 L
(c) 24EI (d) 96EI
1
(c) 100 N-mm/mm3 (d)100mm3/N-mm
286 Solid Mechanics
18. What is the ratio of the strain energy in bar X to Where:

that in bar Y when the material of the two bars is W = Concentrated load
the same? The cross-sectional areas are as indicated l = Length of cantilever
over the indicated lengths. (ESE-2015) EI = Flexural rigidity
22. In a material, the principal stresses are 60 MN/m2,

A l/2 48 MN/m2 and -36 MN/m2. When the values of E =
A 1
200 GN/m2 and m = 0.3, the total strain energy per
unit volume will be nearly (ESE – 2020)
Bar Y (a) 43.5 kNm/m 3
(b) 35.5 kNm/m3
Bar X l/2
(c) 27.5 kNm/m3 (d) 19.5 kNm/m3
A/2
(a) 1/3 (b) 2/3 (c) 4/3 (d) 1/6 KEY & Detailed Solutions
01.(d) 02. (b) 03. (c) 04. (a) 05. (c)
19. A simply supported beam of span l and flexural
06. (a) 07. (c) 08. (d) 09. (a) 10. (b)
rigidity EI carries a unit load at its mid-span. The
strain energy at this condition in the beam due to 11. (c) 12. (b) 13. (d) 14. (b) 15. (d)
bending is (ESE-2017) 16. (a) 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (a)
21. (a) 22. (d)
l3 l3
(a) 48EI (b) 96EI
01. Ans: (d)
l3 l3
(c) 192EI (d) 16EI
T2 L 1 1
Sol: U = 2GJ U \ J and U \
D4
20. A stepped steel shaft is subjected to a clockwise U A = D B4
torque of 10 Nm at its free end. Shear modulus of U B D 4A
steel is 80 GPa. The strain energy stored in the shaft
is (ESE-2017) 02. Ans: (b)
50 mmφ B C Sol: Maximum strain energy at elastic limit (infact
25 mmφ
A T = 10 Nm proportionality limit) is proof resilience.
100 mm 100 mm
03. Ans: (c)
(a) 1.73 Nmm (b) 2.52 Nmm Sol: UA > UB
(c) 3.46 Nmm (d) 4.12 Nmm Toughness of A < Toughness of B
Yield stress of A > yield stress of B
21. The strain energy U stored due to bending of the δlA = δlB. → Ductility of two specimen are equal.
cantilever beam due to point load at the free end
will be (ESE – 2020) 04. Ans: (a)
Sol: Modulus of resilience is the resilience per unit
W2 ,3 W2 ,2
(a) 6EI (b) 6EI volume, therefore
Modulus of resilience, U m = 2 ]σg]ε g
1

W3 ,3 W2 ,3
(c) 36EI (d) 36EI
Chapter 15 Shear Centre
01. The distance of shear center ‘e’ is given by 3. If a load passes through the shear centre,then
B (ESE -1992) there will be only bending in the cross-section
and no twisting. (ESE-1995)
Of these statements
Shear centre
h
e 05. In a thin-wall T-section, the shear centre C is located

at the point shown in
(ESE-1995)
(a) (b)
b2 h3 t b2 h2 t2
(a) 4I (b) 4I C.G C
b2 h2 t
(c) 4I (d) none C

02. In case of a thin channel section, if the resultant (d)
(c)
shear stress does not pass through the shear center, C
then (ESE -1992)
(a) Bending will not occur
C
(b) Bending will occur with torsion
(c) Bending will occur without torsion
(d) There will be neither bending nor torsion 06. Match List-I with List –II and select the correct
03. The shear center of the channel section shown in (ESE-1996)
the figure is at (ESE -1993) List –I List –II
(a) 1 A. Shear centre 1. Tension
2 1
B. Principle plane 2. Slope
(b) 2 C. Fixed end 3. Shear stress
Centroid D. Middle third rule 4. Twisting
(c) 3 3 Codes:
4
e A B C D A B C D
(d) 4 (a) 4 3 2 1 (b) 3 1 4 2
(c) 4 1 2 3 (d) 4 2 3 1
04. Consider the following statements: 07. Consider the following statements:
1. If a beam has two axes of symmetry even A beam of channel cross-section with vertical
then shear centre does not coincide with the web loaded with a concentrated load at mid-span
centroid. in a plane perpendicular to the plane of symmetry
2. For a section having one axis of symmetry,the passing through the centroid subjected to
shear centre does not coincide with the centroid (ESE-1996)
but lies on the axis of symmetry 1. bending moment 2. twisting moment
291 Shear Centre
3. shear force 4. axial thrust 12. In the symmetrical channel section shown in the
Which of these statements are correct? figure below, which point is likely to be the shear
(a) 2, 3 and 4 (b) 1,2 and 3 centre? (ESE-2002)
(c) 1 and 2 (d) 1 and 3 Centroidal axis
08. The shear center of a section is defined as that

point (ESE-1997)
(a) through which the load must be applied to
A B C D
produce zero twisting moment on the section
(b) at which the shear force is zero
(c) at which the shear force is maximum Centroidal axis
(d) at which the shear force is a minimum
09. Shear centre of a semi-circular arc strip of radius ‘r’

will be at a distance of ‘x’ from the centre of the arc,
(a) A (b) B (c) C (d) D
where ‘x’ is equal to (ESE-1998)
13. A point load applied at shear centre induces
(a) π2r (b) 2πr (c) 4πr (d) π4r (ESE-2005)
(a) Zero shear force (b) Zero bending
10. Given that for a channel section, the width of flange (c) Pure twisting (d) Pure bending
= b, the depth of the web between centers of flanges
= h, the thickness of flange = t, the moment of 14. Match List-I (Strain Energy) with List-II
inertia of the channel about the axis of bending =I, (Gradually applied load) and select the correct
the distance of the shear center outside the channel answer using the codes given below the lists
section form the mid-thickness of the web is (σ = direct stress, τ = shear stress, Mx= Bending
(ESE-1999) moment, E = Modulus of elasticity, G = Modulus of
2 2 2 2
th b t h b
(a) I (b) 4I rigidity, I = Area moment of inertia, V= Volume);
(ESE-2006)
th2 b2 t2 hb2
(c) 4I (d) 4I List – I List – II
11. Assertion (A): There is no twisting in an open σ2 V
A. 2E 1. Axial load
section if the point of application of the load passes
through its shear center. τ2 V
B. 2G 2. Bending load
Reason (R): Shear section coincides with the center
of gravity of the open section. (ESE-1999) τ2 V
C. 4G 3. Shear load
Codes: L
M2x dx
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct D. # 2EI 4. Torsional load
explanation of A 0
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not a correct Codes:

explanation of A A B C D A B C D
(c) A is true but R is false (a) 2 3 4 1 (b)
1 4 3 2
(d) A is false but R is true (c) 2 4 3 1 (d)
1 3 4 2
292 Solid Mechanics
15. Which one of the following statements specifies 07. Ans: (b)
P
shear flow? (ESE-2019) Sol:
(a) Flow of shear force along the beam
(b) It is the product of the shear stress at any level
and the corresponding width b (of the section) C
(c) Unbalanced force on any side of given section
divided by area of section
(d) The deformation at any level due to sudden
variation in shear stress The load is not passing through a symmetrical
axis. The beam is subjected to shear force, bending
moment and torsion.
01.(c) 02. (b) 03. (d) 04. (c) 05. (b) 08. Ans: (a)
06. (a) 07. (b) 08. (a) 09. (c) 10. (c) Sol: If the transverse load is applied through Shear
11. (c) 12. (a) 13. (d) 14. (d) 15. (b) centre, the torsion can be completely avoided.
09. Ans: (c)

01. Ans: (c)
Sol:
Sol: To eliminate torsion in the section, shear centre
should be on the left of web by S
b2 h2 t
e = 4I e=4R
π
02. Ans: (b)
Sol: If the resultant force is acting through shear centre
Where, S = Shear centre
torsion developed in the c/s is zero.
10. Ans: (c)

03. Ans: (d)
Sol: b =t
Sol: Shear centre should be in the quadrant where more

area of cross section is located. W
(i.e in 3 rd quadrant) e
h
04. Ans: (c)
Sol: Statement 1 is false: For sections having two axes
of symmetry, centroid and shear centre coincides. Shear centre,
Other statements are correct.
b2 h2 t
e = 4I
05. Ans: (b)
Sol: Shear centre for T-section coincides with flange and
11. Ans: (c)
web junction.
Sol:
06. Ans: (a)
• If the point of application of load is passing
Sol: • Shear centre is related to torsion
through shear center, no torsion develops.
• On principal plane shear stress is zero
• Shear centre need not pass through centroid.
• At fixed end slope is zero.
• Middle third rule is to avoid tension in columns.
Chapter 16 Theories of Failure
01. A thin cylindrical shell of internal diameter D is 06. Assertion (A): In a general three dimensional state
subject to an internal pressure ‘P’. If σy is the yield of stress in an elastic body the yield criterion is
stress of the material of the cylinder, then based on given by
the maximum shear stress theory, the thickness of σ20 = σ12 + σ22 + σ23 − 2µ ^σ1 σ2 + σ2 σ3 + σ3 σ1h
the cylinder will be (ESE -1993) Reason (R): In a ductile material, the yield criterion
is based on maximum distortion energy theory.
pD pD
4 ^σ y − d h

(a) 2σ (b) (ESE -1994)
y
Codes:
pD pD
(c) 4σ (d) (a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct
y 2 _σ y − p i
explanation of A
02. For ductile materials, the most appropriate failure (b) Both A and R are true but R is not a correct
theory is (ESE-1993) explanation of A
(a) maximum shear stress theory (c) A is true but R is false
(b) maximum principal stress theory (d) A is false but R is true
(c) maximum principal strain theory
(d) shear strain energy theory 07. The principal stresses at a point in an elastic material
are 1.5σ (tensile), σ(tensile) and σ/2(comp). If the
03. For the design of a cast iron member, the most elastic limit in simple tension is 2000 kg/ cm2 and
appropriate theory of failure is (ESE-1993) the Poisson’s ratio is 0.30, then the value of ‘σ’ at
(a) Mohr’s theory failure would work out to be 1000 kg/ cm2 according
(b) Rankine’s theory to (ESE-1994)
(c) maximum strain theory (a) maximum principal stress theory
(d) maximum shear energy theory (b) maximum shear stress theory
(c) shear strain energy theory
04. At a point in a steel member, the major principal (d) maximum strain theory
stress is 2000 kg/cm2 and the minor principal stress
is compressive. If the uniaxial yield stress is 2500 08. According to Tresca, yield locus is a/an(ESE-1994)
kg/cm2, then the magnitude of the minor principal (a) Rectangle (b) Circle
stress at which yielding will commence, according (c) Hexagon (d) Ellipse
to the maximum shearing stress theory in (kg/cm2)
is (ESE-1993) 09. At a point in a structure, there are two mutually
(a) 1000 (b) 2000 (c) 2500 (d) 500 perpendicular tensile stresses of 800 kg/ cm2 and
400 kg/ cm2. If the Poisson’s ratio is = 0.25, what
05. A cylindrical shell made of mild steel plate of would be the equivalent stress in simple tension,
100 cm dia is to be subjected to an internal pressure according to maximum principal strain theory
of 10 kg/ cm2. If the material yields at 2000 kg/ (ESE-1995)
cm2 assuming factor of safety as four and using (a) 1200 kg/ cm
2
(b) 900 kg/ cm2
maximum principal stress theory, thickness of plate (c) 700 kg/ cm2 (d) 400 kg/ cm2
will be (in ‘mm’). (ESE-1994)
(a) 15 (b) 10 (c) 15 (d) 20
295 Theories of Failure
10. According to maximum shear stress failure 15. According to the Distortion Energy Theory, failure
criterion, yielding in material occurs when will NOT occur when (symbols have the usual
(ESE-1995) meaning) (ESE-1997)
(a) maximum shear stress = 1/2 × yield stress
^ − h + ^σ2 − σ3h2 + ^σ3 − σ1h2 1/2
(a) c σ1 σ2 m # σo
2
(b) maximum shear stress = 2 × yield stress
2
(c) maximum shear stress = 3 × yield stress
(b) 7^σ1 − σ2h2 + 4τ2A
1/2
(d) maximum shear stress = 2 × yield stress # σo
11. Failure of a ductile material is best explained by (c) 7^σ12 + σ22 + σ23h − µ ^σ1 σ2 + σ2 σ3 + σ3 σ1h1/2A # σ o
(ESE-1995)
^σ1 + σ2h + 7^σ1 − σ2h2 + 4τ2A
1/2
(a) principal stress criterion (d) 2 # σo

(b) principal strain criterion
(c) distortion energy criterion 16. In a strained body, the three principal stresses at a
(d) strain energy criterion point are denoted by σ1, σ2 and σ3 such that σ1 > σ2 >
σ3. If σo denoted yield stress theory, then according
12. In a two-dimensional stress system, it is assumed to the maximum shear stress theory. (ESE-1997)
that the principal stresses σ1 and σ2 are such that (a) σ1−σ2 = σo (b) σ1−σ3 = σo
σ1 > σ2; then according to the maximum shear stress (c) σ2−σ3 = σo (d) (σ1+σ3)/2 = σo
theory, the failure occurs when (where σy is the
yield stress, v = Poisson’s ratio and E the modulus 17. A cube is subjected to equal tensile stress on all
of elasticity) (ESE-1996) the three faces. If the yield stress of the material
(a) [σ1−νσ2] ≥ σy is σy then, based on the strain energy theory, the
(b) 6σ12 + σ22 + 2νσ1 σ2@ $ σ2y maximum tensile stress will be (ESE-1997)
(c) 6σ1 − σ2@ $ σ y σy σy
(a) (b)
(d) 6σ12 + σ22 − σ1 σ2@ $ σ y 3 _1 − 2µ i 3_2 − µ i
σy σy
(c) (d)
13. Maximum stress theory of failure is applicable to _
31 µ − i 3 1 + µi
_

(ESE-1996)
(a) Brittle materials only
18. All the failure theories given nearly the same
(b) Ductile materials only
result (ESE-1997)
(c) Brittle and ductile materials
(a) when one of the principal stresses at a point is
(d) All structural materials
large in comparison to the other
(b) when shear stresses act
14. A certain steel has proportionality limit of
(c) when both the principal stress are numerically
3000 kg/cm2 in simple tension. It is subjected
equal
to principle stress of 1200 kg/cm2 tensile and
(d) for all situations of stress
300 kg/cm2 (compressive). What would be the
factor of safety according to maximum shear stress
19. As per the maximum principal stress theory, when
theory? (ESE -1996)
a shaft is subjected to a bending moment M and
(a) 1.5 (b) 1.75 (c) 1.8 (d) 2.00
torque T; and if σ is the allowable stress in axial
tension, then the diameter d of the shaft is given by
(ESE-1997)
296 Solid Mechanics
Codes:
(a) d3 = πσ ^M + M2 + T2 h
16
A B C D A B C D
(a) 5 3 1 4 (b) 5 1 2 4
(b) d3 = πσ ^M + M2 + T2 h
4
(c)
3 5 1 2 (d)
3 1 2 5
(c) d3 = πσ ^M + M2 + T2 h 23. In a two dimensional stress system, the two

32

principals stresses are σ1 of 180 N/mm2 (tensile)
(d) d3 = πσ ^M + M2 + T2 h and σ2 (Compressive). For the material, yield stress
8

in simple tension and compression is 240 N/mm2
20. At a point in a steel member, the major principal and Poisson’s ratio is 0.25. According to maximum
stress is 200 MPa (tensile) and the minor principal normal strain theory, the value of σ2 at which
stressis compressive. If the uniaxial tensile yield yielding will commence, is (ESE-2001 & 06)
stress is 250 MPa, then according to the maximum (a) 240 N/mm 2
(b) 180 N/mm2
shear stress theory, the magnitude of the minor (c) 195 N/mm2 (d) 200 N/mm2
principal stress. (compressive)at which yielding 24. At a certain point in a structural member, there are
will commence is (ESE -1998) perpendicular stresses 80 N/mm2 and 20 N/mm2,
(a) 200 MPa (b) 100 MPa both tensile. What is the equivalent stress tension,
(c) 50 MPa (d) 25 MPa according to the maximum principal strain theory?
(Poisson’s ratio = 0.25) (ESE-2005)
21. A member is made of structural steel. When (a) zero (b) 20N/mm2
it is subjected to simple tension, the limit of (c) 60 N/mm2 (d) 75N/mm2
proportionality is 280 N/mm2. If the principal stress
p1 and p2 developed in the member are 100 N/mm2 25. Consider the following statements:
(tensile) and 40 N/mm2 (compressive) respectively Assertion (A): For a ductile material the maximum
and Poisson’s ratio is 0.30, then the factor of safety shear distortion theory is most suitable.
according to maximum shear stress theory would Reason (R) : The maximum shear distortion theory
be (ESE-2000) of failure assumes that yielding can occur in a
(a) 2.75 (b) 2.5 (c) 2.25 (d) 2.0 general three-dimensional state of stress.
Of these statements: (ESE-2006)
22. Match List-I (Theory of failures) with List-II (a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct
(Scientists) and select the correct answer using the explanation of A
codes given below the lists: (ESE-2000) (b) Both A and R are true but R is not a correct
List – I explanation of A
A. Maximum principal stress theory (c) A is true but R is false
B. Maximum shear stress theory (d) A is false but R is true
C. Maximum principal strain theory 26. According to maximum shear stress criterion, at
D. Maximum distortion energy theory what ratio of maximum shear stress to yield stress
List –II of material does the yielding of material take place?
1. St. Venant 2. Beltrami and Haigh (ESE-2007)
2
3. Tresca 4. Von-Mises (a) 2 (b)
3
5. Rankine
1 1
(c) (d) 2
3
27. The details of the principal stresses at a certain 31. Steel has proportionality limit of 300 MPa in
point in a steel member are as follows: simple tension it is subjected to principal stresses
Major principal stress σ1 =180 N/mm2 (Tensile) of 120 MPa (tensile), 60 MPa (tensile) and
Minor principal stress σ2 is Compressive. If the 30 MPa (compressive). What is the factor of safety
uniaxial tensile yield stress is 240 N/mm2, according according to maximum shear stress theory?
to maximum shear stress theory, what would be the (ESE-2012)
value of σ2 in N/mm2 at which the yield of material (a) 1.5 (b) 1.75 (c) 1.8 (d) 2.0
will commence? (ESE-2009)
(a) 120 tension 32. According to maximum shear stress failure theory,
(b) 90 tension yielding occurs in the material when (ESE-2012)
(c) 80 compression (a) Max. shear stress = yield stress
(d) 60 compression (b) Max. shear stress = 2 times yield stress
(c) Max. shear stress = ½ of yield stress
28. An element of a structure is subjected to two (d) Max. shear stress= 2 time yield stress
principal stresses σ1 and σ2
33. For the design of a cast iron member, the most
σ1 = 200 N/mm2 (Tensile)
appropriate theory of failure is (ESE-2012)
σ2 is compressive
(a) Mohr’s theory
The yield stress both in simple tension and
(b) Rankine’s theory
compression for the material is 240 N/mm2.
(c) Maximum stress theory
Poission’s ratio µ= 0.25; what is the value of
(d) Maximum shear energy theory
s2 in N/mm2 as per maximum normal strain theory
at which the yield of material will commence? 34. A cylindrical shell of 100 cm diameter made of
(ESE-2009) mild steel plate is to be subjected to an internal
(a) 240 (b) 200 pressure of 10 kg/cm2. If the material yields at a
(c) 180 (d) 160 stress of 200 kg/cm2, assuming factor of safety as
4 and using maximum principal stress theory, the
29. The limit of proportionality in the material of a required thickness of the plate will be (ESE-2012)
structural steel member, when subjected to simple (a) 8 cm (b) 10 cm (c) 12 cm (d) 15 cm
tension, is 280 N/mm2. The principal stresses in the 35. Which of the following statements are correct?
member are σ1 = 122 N/mm2 (Tensile) and σ2=60 N/ 1. Experimental results on thin-walled tubes
mm2 (Compressive).µ=0.3. According to maximum show that maximum normal stress theory is
strain theory, the factor of safety is (ESE-2010) valid.
(a) 2.5 (b) 1.5 2. Normal stress theory is valid in case of brittle
(c) 2 (d) 3 materials.
3. In case of pure shear, St. Venant’s theory is
30. Which of the following theories of failure is most more valid than other theories.
appropriate for a brittle material (ESE-2011) 4. Tresca’s theory is very closely substantiated
(a) Maximum principal strain theory by experimental results.
(b) Maximum principal stress theory 5. In maximum stress theory, the yield locus is a
(c) Maximum shear stress theory hexagon. (ESE-2013)
(d) Maximum strain energy theory (a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 2, 4 and 5
(c) 1, 2 and 4 (d) 2, 3 and 4
298 Solid Mechanics
36. A thin cylindrical shell made of mild steel plate is 40. A machine element develops principal stresses
1000 mm in diameter. It is to be subjected to an of magnitudes 2P and P. What is the maximum
internal pressure of 2 N/mm2. If the material yields magnitude of P before the material reaches the yield
at 200 N/mm2, the thickness of the plate in mm stress fy as per Distortion Shear Energy Theory?
on the basis of Rankine’s theory of failure with (ESE – 2015)
fy
assuming a factor of safety of 3 would be (a) fy (b) 2
(ESE-2013)
fy fy
(a) 10 (b) 12 (c) 15 (d) 18 (c) (d)
2 3 3
37. Statement (I): The most-suited failure theory for

concrete is maximum shear strength theory 41. A structural element is subjected to a two-
Statement (II): Ductile materials are limited by dimensional stress system, wherein σ1 = 225 N/mm2
their shear strength. (ESE – 2014) (tensile) with σ2 being compressive. The yield stress
Codes: in both simple tension (σy)t and simple compression
(a) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are (σy)c is 250 N/mm2 and µ = 0.25. What is the value
individually true and Statement (II) is the of σ2, according to Maximum Strain Theory?
correct explanation of Statement (I) (ESE – 2015)
(b) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are (a) 200 N/mm 2
(b) 150 N/mm2
individually true but statement (II) is not the (c) 125 N/mm2 (d) 100 N/mm2
correct explanation of statement (I) 42. A structural element is subjected to pure shear of 80
(c) Statement (I) is true but Statement (II) is false N/mm2, as shown in the figure. The yield stresses
(d) Statement (I) is false but Statement (II) is true both in tension and in compression are 240 N/mm2.
According to the maximum normal stress theory,
38. In a two – dimensional stress system, the principal the factors of safety in tension and compression are,
stresses are σ1 = 200 N/mm2 (tensile) and σ2 = respectively (ESE-2016)
(compressive). The yield stress in both simple 80N/mm2
tension and compression is 250 N/mm2, with µ =
0.25. What will be the value of σ2 according to the
80N/mm2
maximum normal strain theory? (ESE – 2014) 80N/mm2
(a) 160 N/mm
2
(b) 100 N/mm2
(c) 200 N/mm2 (d) 250 N/mm2 80N/mm2
39. A cylindrical pressure vessel is 1200 mm in (a) 2 and 2 (b) 2.5 and 2.5
diameter. It is made of rolled mild steel plate. The (c) 3 and 3 (d) 4 and 4
vessel is subjected to an internal pressure of 2 N/
43. Principal stresses at a point are 80 N/mm2 and 40
mm2. If the material yields at 200 N/mm2,
N/mm2, both tensile. The yield stress in simple
what should be the minimum safe thickness of the
tension for this material is 200 N/mm2. The values
plate, based on Maximum Principal Stress Theory?
of factors of safety according to maximum principal
Use factor of safety 3. (ESE – 2015)
stress theory and maximum shear stress theory,
(a) 18 mm (b) 15 mm
respectively, are (ESE-2016)
(c) 12 mm (d) 9 mm
(a) 2.5 and 2.5 (b) 2.5 and 5
(c) 5 and 5 (d) 5 and 1.67
44. The principal stresses at a point are 2σ (tensile) and

σ (compressive), and the stress at elastic limit for the KEY & Detailed Solutions
material in simple tension is 210 N/mm2. According 01. (a) 02. (d) 03. (b) 04. (d) 05. (b)
to maximum shear strain theory, the value of σ at 06. (b) 07. (b) 08. (c) 09. (c) 10. (a)
failure is (ESE-2016)
11. (c) 12. (c) 13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (a)
(a) 70 N/mm 2
(b) 105 N/mm2
16. (b) 17. (a) 18. (a) 19. (a) 20. (c)
(c) 140 N/mm2 (d) 210 N/mm2
21. (d) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (d) 25. (a)
45. The state of stress at a point in an elastic material, 26. (d) 27. (d) 28. (d) 29. (c) 30. (b)
with yield stress of 200 MPa in simple tension, and 31. (d) 32. (c) 33. (b) 34. (b) 35. (a)
Poisson’s ratio 0.3, is as shown in the figure.
36. (c) 37. (d) 38. (c) 39. (a) 40.(d)
2σ
41.(d) 42. (c) 43. (b) 44. (a) 45. (b)
46. (a)
1.4σ 1.4σ
01. Ans: (a)
Sol: For the thin cylinder subjected to internal pressure
2σ ‘P’, hoop stress is the major principal stress.
PD
The permissible value of σ by maximum strain Hoop stress = fh = 2t
theory is (ESE-2017) Given yield stress = σy
(a) 75 MPa (b) 100 MPa According to maximum shear stress theory
(c) 150 MPa (d) 200 MPa f PD σ y
τmax = 2h = 4t = 2
46. A bolt is under an axial thrust of 9.6 kN together PD

& t = 2σ
with a transverse force of 4.8 kN. If factor of y
safety is 3, yield strength of bolt material is 270 N/

mm2 and Poisson’s ratio is 0.3, its diameter as per
02. Ans: (d)
maximum principal stress theory will be nearly
Sol: Ductile materials generally fail in shear. In fact for
(ESE – 2020)
ductile materials both shear stress theory and shear
(a) 13 mm (b) 15 mm (c) 17 mm (d) 19 mm
strain energy theory are useful. However shear
strain energy theory satisfies the practical results
much better for ductile materials compared to shear
stress theory.
03. Ans: (b)

Sol: Cast iron is a Brittle material. Brittle materials
generally fail due to direct stress. Hence Rankine’s
theory, also called maximum principal stress theory
is useful for Brittle materials like cast iron, plain
concrete, bronze etc.
Chapter 17 Statics
01. For the coplanar concurrent system of forces as 03. Parallelogram law of forces states that if two forces
shown in the given figure, the system will be acting simultaneously at a point be represented in
(ESE-1995) magnitude and direction by two adjacent sides of a
parallelogram, their resultant may be represented in
F1=10 KN
magnitude and direction by (ESE-1995)
F2=20 KN (a) longer side of the other two sides
450
F3
(b) shorter side of the other two sides
(c) diagonal of the parallelogram which does not
(a) in equilibrium if IF3I = 10 kN pass through their point of intersection.
(b) in equilibrium if IF3I = 10 2 kN (d) diagonal for the parallelogram which passes
(c) in equilibrium of IF3I = 20 kN through their point of intersection
(d) will not be in equilibrium whatever be the
magnitude of F3 04. In order to find the resultant of a system of coplanar
parallel system of forces, the correct sequence of
02. Two coplanar concurrent forces P1 = 2t and P2 = the graphical procedure to be followed is
2t meeting at O act on a lamina at 45o as shown in (ESE-1996)
figure. (ESE-1995) (a) force diagram, space diagram, funicular
polygon and polar diagram
P2=2t (b) funicular polygon, force diagram, space
C B diagram and polar diagram
(c) space diagram, force diagram, polar diagram
R
and funicular polygon
450
P1=2t (d) space diagram, funicular polygon, force
O A
diagram and polar diagram
From the force diagram, the force R to be applied at 05. Three coplanar forces P1 = P2 = P3 = 2t act at a joint
O in order to keep the body in equilibrium is given O, as shown in figure (ESE-1996)
by
(a) (b)
C P2=2t
a 2t
b
45o
R C
R
2t
2t B
P3=2t 450
450
c a 2t D 900
b
C O P1=2t
(c) (d)
a 2t
b
45o A
R
R
2t
2t From the force diagram, the force R to be applied
45 0 at O in the same plane to keep the joint O in
c a 2t b equilibrium is given by
306 Solid Mechanics
(a)
07. In the diagram, below, if Q is made equal to P and
d (b) d
450 450 the resultant force (R) is also made equal to P, then
2t the value of angle θ will be (ESE-1998)
C
2t C
R R
Q R
2t 2t
θ
a 2t b a 2t b P
(c) a 2t
b a 2t
b
(a) 120 (b) 60o
o
(d)
2t (c) 45o (d) 30o
R R
2t
d d
45o 2t
45o 08. If the given force P1, P2, P3 and P4 which are coplanar
2t
and concurrent are such that the force polygon does
c
c
not close, then the system will
(ESE-1998)
06. In a beam AB, support A is hinged and support B (a) be in equilibrium
is on rollers as shown below. The directions of the (b) always reduce to a resultant force
reactions at A and B will be as in (ESE-1997) (c) always reduce to a couple
(d) always be in equilibrium and will always
2t reduce to a couple
A B
450
09. Two coplanar force P1 = 2t and P2 = 2 t meeting at
(a) O act on lamina ar α = 45o as shown in the figure
(ESE-1998)
2t From the force diagram. Force R, the resultant of P1
RA A B
and P2, to be applied at O is given by
450
RB P2=2t
(b) C B
2t R
A B 450
45 0 P1=2t
RA A
RB
(c) (a) 2t (b) c
a b
2t 450
A B R
2t
450 R 2t 450
RA a b
RB 2t
c
(d) (c) 2t c
a (d)
b
2t 45 0
A B R
R 2t
45 0 2t
450
RA a
RB c 2t b
307 Statics
10. If forces P1,P2, P3 and P4 of a system are such that 16kN

the force polygon does not close, then the system
will (ESE-1999)
1.5m
(a) be in equilibrium
(b) reduce to a resultant force
(c) reduce to a couple A B
(d) not be in equilibrium
24 kN
11. Assertion (A): The coefficient of friction is the 2m 2m
ratio of limiting frictional force to normal reaction
(a) 16 kN, 18 kN (b) 16 kN, 6 kN
between two bodies in contact and one body being
(c) 6 kN, 16 kN (d) 8 kN, 6 kN
just sliding on the other.
Reason (R): The limiting friction is the maximum
14. In the frame shown below, what is the horizontal
value of frictional force, which comes into play,
reaction at left support ? (ESE-2008)
when a body just begins to slide over the surface of
5 kN
the other body. (ESE-2002)
Codes:
10 kN
explanation of A L L
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not a correct L
explanation of A L L L L
3 kN
(d) A is false but R is true L L

(a) 15 kN (b) 13kN
12. A free body diagram of a body shows (ESE-2002)
(c) 7 kN (d) 2 kN
(a) A body isolated from all external effects
without considering its own weight
(b) A body isolated from its surroundings and all
external forces acting on it KEY & Detailed Solutions
(c) A body isolated from it surroundings and all 01.(d) 02. (c) 03. (d) 04. (c) 05. (b)
external actions on it
06. (c) 07. (a) 08. (b) 09. (c) 10. (d)
(d) A body isolated from its surroundings and all
internal forces acting on it 11. (b) 12. (c) 13. (b) 14. (c)
13. What are the magnitudes of horizontal and vertical 01. Ans: (d)
support reactions, respectively at support A of the Sol: ∑Fy = 0
frame shown below ? (ESE-2007) 10 = F3 sin45 ⇒ F3 = 2 ]10g
20 = F3 cos45 ⇒ F3= 2 ]20g

Two different values for F3 are not possible.
∴ The system can not be in equilibrium.

Material Properties: (ESE - 1992) (ESE - 1992)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Material Properties: (ESE - 1992) (ESE - 1992)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter 1 Material Properties

4. High tensile strength (ESE-1998) 2. Decreased resistance of material to repeated

26. Creep of the gradual increase of (ESE-2001) Codes:

Statement (II): The failure occurs on a plane of the

Strain 02. Ans: (a)

03. Ans: (a)

04. Ans: (b)

15. A bar 4 cm in diameter is subjected to an axial load

C (c) µ(εx+εy+εz) (d) (1/εx) +(1/εy)+(1/εz)

22. A solid metal bar of uniform diameter D and length

34. Consider the following statements:

ratio are assumed to be the same in tension as well

37. A rigid bar is supported by a spring as shown in the

The ratio of the elongation of the two wires, Ac/As is

(a) be in tension and compression respectively

C D A 55. The bulk modulus of elasticity of a material is twice

(c) a bαt + αEtv l (d) aαt(1−v)

L 61. If the Young’s modulus ‘E’ is equal to the bulk

59. A rigid bar AB is supported by a spring as shown

93. For a given elastic material, the Elastic Modulus E

94. Lead, as a material used in construction, has

96. Statement (I): The failure surface of an axially

99. The longitudinal strain of a cylindrical bar of 25 mm

2. Dilatation is not proportional to the algebraic

3A 113. A steel wire of 20 mm diameter is bent into a circular

06. A cast iron block is 5 cm2 cross-section carries an

(a) 300 (b) 450 (c) 600 (d) 750

16. On an element shown in the given figure, the

20. In a plane stress problem, there are normal tensile

^ 2 + 2h1/2 ^P 2 + P22h 1/2

34. The given figure shows the stress condition of an

44. A thin rod of 10mm diameter is subjected to a tensile

48. For a state of plane stress σ1=σx= 40 MPa and σ2 =

For this state of stress, what is the maximum shear

the centre of the Mohr’s circle are (ESE-2010)

69. In a strained material, the principal stresses in the X 73.

70. Which one of the following statements is correct?

Statement (II): Mohr’s theory generalizes

87. Which of the following stresses is measured on

σ1=60 Ν/mm2 300 N/mm2 300 N/mm2

93. The state of stress on an element is as shown in the σy=40 MPa

figure. If E = 2 × 105 N/mm2 and Poisson’s ratio

(c) 34 N/mm2 (d) 24 N/mm2 25 MPa

94. A square element of a structural part is subjected to 90 MPa 90 MPa

these conditions will be (ESE – 2016)

98. The state of stress at a point is given by : σx = 80 300

MPa, σy = 100 MPa and τxy = 60 MPa. If the yield 80MN/mm2

strength for the material is 150 MPa, as determined

01.(b) 02.(d) 03.(c) 04.(c) 05.(a)

56.(b) 57.(a) 58.(d) 59.(c) 60.(b)

05. Match List –I with List-II and select the correct

Codes: 09. In a cantilever beam the bending moment at end

List -II (ESE-1995) 15. A simply-supported beam is loaded as shown in the

L The loaded beam will be

Of these statements (ESE-1998) (a) 0.333 m 5 kN

40 kNm 33. The bending moments at a point A, B and C of the

(a) 10 kNm, 10 kNm and 10kNm

37. A unique relation between bending moment (M)

38. Assertion (A): The bending moment at a section of

2W W W/2 39. Neglecting self weight, which of the following

(b) concentrated load at mid span

54. A cantilever beam AB carries loading as shown in

(a) W/2 (b) W/4 (c) W (d) zero